Unit 1. My hobbies. Lesson 1. Getting started

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.47 MB, 233 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Preparation day: 16/ 8/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 8/ 2015 6B: ……/ 8/ 2015 6E: ……/ 8/ 2015

Period 1

HƯỚNG DẪN CÁCH HỌC & ÔN TẬP ĐẦU NĂM

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge

: Understand about learning program of new English 6.

- Skills: - Know some methods of learning English well.

- Prepare carefully for this subject such as: a textbook, a workbook, a notebook
and some objects of learning.

- Attitude: To teach Ss to be interested in learning this subject.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: Textbook, workbook, objects of teaching.
III- Teaching process:

* Organization: Attendance:

6A:………/……. Absence:………..
6B:……../……... Absence:……….
6C:……../……... Absence:……….
1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- Ask some Ss introduce something about themselves.
2. Warm- up:(3 minutes)

Jumbled words: OOLCHS, REARSE, NETOBKOO
SCHOOL, ERASER, NOTEBOOK
- T gives the comment Then introduces the new lesson.
3- New lesson: (30

minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1:Introducing the content of English 6 ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know the content of English
book 6 ( textbook and workbook )
*Process:

- T introduces structures English
book 6 and the aims of each section.
- T introduces the content of each
unit and the total of all units in
English 6.

Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can

1. Nội dung ch ơng trình môn tiếng Anh líp 6
m

ới

- Gồm 12 đơn vị bài học, mỗi đơn vị bài gồm 8

phần : GETTING STARTED, CLOSER LOOK
1, CLOSER LOOK 2, SKILL 1, SKILL 2,

LOOKING BACK, COMMUNICATION,

PROJECT.

- Sách được biên soạn theo đường hướng giao
tiếp, giúp HS sử dụng ngữ liệu (ngữ âm, từ
vựng, ngữ pháp) để phát triển năng lực giao tiếp
bằng tiếng Anh qua 4 kĩ năng Nghe- Nói-
Đọc-Viết trong đó ưu tiên kĩ năng nghe và nói.

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

understand about the program of

English 6. ngôn ngữ và kĩ năng ngôn ngữ HS đã được họcvà rèn luyện.
Sách bài tập theo bộ sách giáo khoa cũng bao
gồm 2 tập: tập 1 và tập 2. Mỗi đơn vị bài tập
gồm 5 phần: PHONETICS, VOCABULARY &
GRAMMAR, SPEAKING, READING,

WRITING. Có 4 bài Test yourelf 1, 2, 3,&4.
 Activity 2:Introducing the methods and commands of learning E 6 (10’)
*Aims:

- Ss know the ways to learn program
of English 6.

* Process:

-T Introduces all methods of
learning English 6 and gets Ss to
remember.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can
remember the ways to learn program
of English 6.

2. Ph ơng pháp học môn tiếng Anh
* Ở nhà:

- Đọc bài, nghe băng trước khi tới lớp, liệt kê
các từ mới.

- Học thuộc từ vựng, mẫu câu, đặt câu với
những từ vựng và mẫu câu.

- Làm bài tập đầy đủ trước khi tới lớp.

- Làm thêm các bài tập ở các sách bổ trợ, nâng
cao, sách bài tập tiếng Anh 6.

- Dich các đoạn văn, các bài hội thoại trong sách
giáo khoa sau mỗi tiết học.

* Ở lớp:

- Chú nghe giảng, tích cực phát biểu xây dựng

bài.

- Luyện tập theo cặp, nhóm tích cực theo u
cầu của giáo viên.

- Ghi chép bài đầy đủ, sạch sẽ.

- Trao đổi với bạn bè hoặc mạnh dạn hỏi thầy cô
những vấn đề chưa nắm rõ.

Activity 3: Preparations ( 5 minutes)
*Aims:

Ss can know the preparations for
learning English.

*Process:

- Gets Ss to prepare the books,
notebooks,

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can know
and have enough preparations for
learning English 6.

3. Yêu cầu về tài liệu, sách vở, đồ dùng học 
tập

- Có đầy đủ sách giáo khoa, sách bài tập theo bộ
sách giáo khoa, băng nghe

- Mua thêm sách Bài tập tiếng Anh 6 tham khảo
- Có 1 quyển vở ghi bài ở lớp, mỗi từ mới yêu
cầu viết 3 dòng sau phần ghi bài của mỗi tiết.
- Có vở nháp, bút ghi bài, bút đỏ, bút chì, tẩy
chì.

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Ask SS to retell some information that they have been given:
S1: Program of English 6

S2: The methods of learning English

S3: The requirements of materials and school things
5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 8/ 2015 6B: ……/ 8/ 2015 6E: ……/ 8/ 2015

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

Period 2 LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue

on page six and use some expressions in the conversation, some school things.

- Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation among Phong, Phong’s mum, Vy and
Duy; listen to a poem.

+ Reading: Read the conversation and then do true/ false exercise and find the
expressions in the conversation.

+ Speaking: work in pair to create short role- play with the expressions.
+ Writing: Use a model poem to write a poem about their partner.
- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.

II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

* Organization: Attendance:

6D: ……./……. Absence: ………..
6E: ……../…….. Absence: ………… ………….
1. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

Free talk:

- Teacher asks students some questions about their first day of new school year at new
school:

* How do you feel on the first day of the new school year? -> feel happy/ eager/ excited...
* Why do we call "a special day"? -> Because it is the first day in a new school with new

friends, new teachers and many things new.

* What do all of you look like on that day?-> look beautiful/ smart/ cute...
* Do you love your new school? Why?-> Yes. Because...

3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation ( 7 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify
their meanings and use them to make sentences
and know what they are going to listen.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/
real object/ translation/ situation

- T: writes new words on the board.

- SS: listen and repeat in individual first then
the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember
* Presentation the conversation:

I. New words :

- ex’cited (adj): háo hưc
* be excited about:
- ’heavy (adj): năng

- ’calculator (n): máy tính câm tay
- ’uniform (n): đơng phục

- wear (v) = put on: măc
- ’compass (n): compa
- ’borrow (v):

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Ask SS to look at the picture and answer the
questions:

+ What is Phong doing?
+ Who are Vy and Duy?

- Teacher sets the scene: Today is the first day
of the new school year. Vy comes over Phong's
house so that they can go to school together.
But phong is having breakfast. Now listen to
the conversation among them.

- T: asks SS to do true/ false prediction.
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new words and
what they are going to listen.

* True/ False prediction:
1. Duy and Vy are early.
2. Phong is eating breakfast.
3. Duy is Phong’s friend.
4. Duy lives near Phong.

5. Phong is wearing a school uniform.
Activity 2: Practice ( 13 minutes)

*Aims:

- SS get the content of the conversation among
the four people and then complete the
exercises.

* Process:

- Play the tape and ask students to listen
without textbook for the first time, the second
time repeating the conversation with book.

- Get Ss to repeat in chorus.
- Get Ss to work in group of four.
- Correct their pronunciations.

- Ask SS to work in pair to do true/ false
exercise( a).

Feed back.

- Ask Ss to work in group to do exercise (b)
- Feedback.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand the
conversation and complete the exercises.

II-Practice:
1. Listen.
2. Read.
3. Practice.

a) Are these sentences true or false?
1.T

2.T

3.F ( Phong’s -> Vy’s)
4.T

5.F ( Phong -> Duy)

b) Find these expressions in the
conversation. Check what they mean
1.Oh dear: used to express surprise
2. You'll see: You'll find out

3. Come in: used to invite sb in

4. Sure: used to say "yes/ alright"

Activity 3: Production ( 10 minutes)
*Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and writing skill
by doing some exercises.

*Process:

- Ask SS to work in pair to make short- role
plays with the expressions.

- Call 2- 3 pairs to practice in front of the
rest.

- Give the remarks if necessary.

- T: plays the tape and ask SS to repeat the
poem.

- Call 2- 3 SS to read the poem again.

- Ask SS to work in pair to write the poem
about their partner using the given poem.

III. Further practice:

1. Work in pairs. Create short 
role-plays with the expressions. Then

practice them.

Eg:

A: Can you open the window, please?
B: Sure.

A: Thanks.

S1: The film is very interesting. You’ll
see.

S2: I hope so.

2. Listen and read the following 
poem.

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Call 1- 2 SS to read their poem aloud.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can make dialogues
and write the poem.

Get up, Hoa
Get up, Hoa

You’re going back to school

Your friends are going back to school,
too.

The new school year starts today.
You’ve got nice clothes

You’ve got new books

Your friends are on their way.
3. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- Ask SS to match the words with the school things. Then listen and repeat.
Answer keys:

1.b ; 2.e; 3.j; 4.d; 5.c; 6.i; 7.f; 8.a; 9.g; 10.h

4. Practice and consolidation:(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the conversation; some expressions and review
the words about school things.

- Guide SS to learn new words: learning tip.
5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart.
- Read the conversation again.

- Do exercises: A2; B1-B2 ( page 3+ 4- workbook)+ Translate the conversation in
Getting started into Vietnamese.

- Prepare: A closer look 1/ Page 8- textbook.

Preparation day: 16/ 8/ 2015

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

Period 3

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get some new words
about the subjects and sports they learn and play at school, know the verbs go with these
words, learn pronunciation sounds /

ᵊᵘ/

and / ᴧ/ .

- Skills: + Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /

ᵊᵘ/

and / ᴧ/ they hear.

+ Writing: use the verbs and words given to make phrases, use the words given to
complete the sentences, write more sentences about yourself.

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: to go to the board to write new words, make 2 sentences with the words.
- S2: does A2 ( p3 workbook)

2. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

Write as many words as you can from the word: GEOGRAPHY
 Eg: go, grape, are, ear, hear, rear, rare, roar,
3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 20 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,
identify their meanings and use them to
make sentences and do some exercises
relating these words and phrases.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/
mine/ visual aids/ translation/ situation
- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember

- Play the tape exercise 1 (p
8-textbook) and ask SS to listen and
repeat twice. (book closed)

- Play once ask SS to repeat in turn.

- Ask SS to work in group to put the
words in exercise 1 into groups.

- Feedback.

- Ask SS to add more nouns to the
groups.

I. Vocabulary

physic (n) : môn vật lý
history(n) : môn lịch sử
judo (n) : mơn võ juđơ

maths (n)= mathematics: mơn tốn
science(n): khoa học

team(n): đội

interesting (adj): thú vị.

healthy (adj): khỏe mạnh, lành mạnh.
Study (v): học, nghiên cứu.

1. Listen and repeat the words

2. Work in pairs. Put the words into groups.

play do have study

football homework school

lunch Physics

music Judo lesson English

baseball exercise dinner vocabulary

…… housework a bath History

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- Ask SS to work in pair to do exercise
3 (p8).

- Feedback.

- Ask SS to work individually to write
sentences about themselves using the
combination in exercise 2.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new
words and complete the exercises.

e. science.

4. Write sentences about yourself using the
combinations above.

Eg:

a. We have English lesson on Monday.
b. I do my homework every evening.
c. I study History at school.

d. I do the housework every afternoon.
Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation ( 10 minutes)

*Aims:

To help SS to learn and practice the
sounds

ᵊᵘ/

and / ᴧ/.
* Process:

- Play the tape one time, book
closed.

- Play the tape twice, book open, and
ask SS to repeat.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read again.

- Play the tape in exercise 6 and ask
SS to work individually to put the
words into two groups.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know
pronounce the 2 sounds and identify
them in the words and sentences.

II Pronunciation:

1. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the 
sounds /

ᵊᵘ/

and / ᴧ/

2. Listen to the words and put them into two 
groups.

3. Practice.

ᵊᵘ/

/ ᴧ/

Rode Some

Don’t Monday

Hope Month

Homework Come

Post One

4. Listen and repeat. Underline the sounds 
/

ᵊᵘ/

and / ᴧ/ you hear.

1. They are going to open a new library.

2. I’m coming home from school.

3. His brother eats lunch in the school canteen.
4. The new school year starts next month.
5. My brother is doing his homework.
6. He goes to the judo club every Sunday.
4. Practice and consolidation:(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and phrases.
- Ask SS to do exercise A1( workbook- page 3)

Answer keys: 1D, 2C, 3A, 4. B, 5. C
5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart.

- Practice pronouncing the sounds / ᵊᵘ/ and / ᴧ/ and read all exercises in pronunciation in
textbook (page 8) again.

- Do exercises: B3- B4- B5 ( page 4+ 5-
workbook)

- Prepare: A closer look 2/ Page 9+ 10-
textbook

Tổ trưởng duyệt giáo án
Việt Trì, ngày 17 tháng 8 năm 2015
 Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / 8/ 2015

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

Period 4

LESSON 3: A CLOSER LOOK 2

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to

use the present simple
and the present continuous, use the present simple verbs with the third singular subject in
the positive, negative and questions.

- Skills:+ Listening: Listen to get information about school activities.

+ Speaking: Talk about school activities, subjects and what Ss do at school.

+ Reading: Read for specific information about schools, and read e-mails and web
pages.

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (4 minutes)

- S1: Does B4- workbook page 5 - S2: Does B5 – workbook page 5
2. Warm- up: ( 2 minutes)

- Ask SS to give 10 words containing the sounds /

ᵊᵘ/

and / ᴧ/

( cup/ some/ thump/ come/ sometimes/ go/ homework/ so/ toe/ hold/told/ rode/
3- New lesson: (35 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 5 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read new

words, identify their meanings and
use them to make sentences

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: visual
aids/ translation/ example

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words
again.

Checking: rub out and remember
*Conclusion: - Almost all the
students know new words and
complete the exercises.

I. Vocabulary

- playground /ˈpleɪ.graʊnd/ : sân chơi
- walk /wɔːk/ : đi bộ

- ride /raɪd/ : đi (xe đạp)
- teach /tiːtʃ/ : dạy
- read /riːd/ : đọc

- break time /breɪk taɪm / : giờ giải lao

Activity 2: Presentation ( 7 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to learn the two
tenses: the present simple
tense and the present
continuous tense.

II. Grammar

1. The Present simple
a. Example.

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

* Process:

- T gives the example. And
ask SS to tell the uses of the
present simple tense.

- Ask SS to give more

examples and then ask them to
give the form of the tense.

- T gives the example. And
ask SS to tell the uses of the
present simple tense.

- Ask SS to give more
examples and then ask them to
give the form of the tense.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can
know the usage and form of
the present simple tense and
the present continuous tense.

- She sometimes goes out on Friday night.
b. Usage.

We use the present simple tense when:
 the action is general.

 the action happens all the time, or habitually.
 the statement is always true.

c. Form

(+) I/ We/ You/ They + V + O.
 He/ She / It + V(s/es) + O.

(-) I/ We/ You/ They + do not + V + O.
 He/ She / It + does + not + V + O.
(?) Do + I / we/ you / they + V + O?

Yes, I / we/ you / they + do/ No, I / we/ you / they+
don’t.

Does + he/ she/ it + V + O?

Yes, he/ she / it + does./ No, he/ she /it + does not.
2. The Present continuous tense

a. Example.

- Nam is reading a book. / - They are writing.
- I am learning English.

b. Usage.

We use the present continuous tense to denote an
action that is happening at speaking time.

c. Form

(+) S + is/ am/ are + V.ing+ O
(-) S + is/ am/ are + not + V.ing + O

(?) Is/ Am/ Are + S + V.ing + O?

Yes, S + is/ am/ are/ No, S + is/ am/ are + not.
Activity 3: Practice ( 18 minutes)

*Aims:

- Ss practice the present simple tense
and the present continuous tense by
completing the exercises.

*Process:

- Ss do the task 1 individually (in 3
ms)

- T. calls some Ss to say their
answers

- T. gives explanation and answer
keys.

- Ask SS to work in pair to read the
dialogue in task 1 and do task 2.
- Ask 2 SS to go to the board to give
the answer.

- T corrects if necessary.

- Ask SS to work in pair to do task 3:

interview his/ her partner.

- Call 5 pairs to practice in front of

III. Practice

1. Miss Nguyet is interviewing Duy for the 
school newsletter. Write the correct form of the
verbs.

1. has 2. Do you have
3. love 4. Does Vy walk
5. ride 6. teaches

7. doesn’t play 8. reads
9. go 10 do

2. Correct the sentences according to the 
information in 1 above.

1. Duy lives near here.

2. Duy likes/loves his new school.
3. Vy and Duy ride bikes to school.
4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.
5. At break time, Phong reads in the

library.

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

the rest.

- T corrects if necessary.

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and
underline the present continuous
form.

- Ss work in groups (with 4 Ss) to do
task 5.

- Feedback.

- Ss work individually to do task 6.
- Feedback.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can
complete the exercises.

1. Do you ride your bicycle to school?
2. Do you read in the library at break time?
3. Do you like your new school?

4. Do your friends go to school with you?
5. Do you do your homework after school?
4. Listen to part of the conversation from 
getting started again. Then find and underline 
the present continuous form.

1. is knocking 2. Is having
3. are wearing

5. Complete the sentences with the correct form
of the verbs.

1. am not playing 2. are studying
3. aren’t doing 4. am having
5. are riding

6. Choose the correct tense of the verbs.
1. are having 2. wears

3. starts 4. is watching
5. are skipping

Activity 4: Production (5minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to use the present
simple tense and the present
continuous tense correctly by
completing task 7.

*Process:

- Ask SS to read the e- mail.

- Ask SS to work in pair to underline
things that often happen or are fixed.

Then underline things that are

happening now.
- Feedback.

- Ask SS to work individually to do
task 7b.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can do the
exercises.

IV. Further practice

1. Read Vy’s e-mail to her friend.

2. Underline things that often happen or are 
fixed. Then underline things that are happening
now.

3. Compare Vy’s first week with yours.

Me Vy

Wear uniform….
………
………
………

Wear uniform on
Mon and Sat…..
………
………..

4. Practice and consolidation: (2 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the present simple and the present continuous
tense.

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Ask Ss to learn new words + grammar structures by heart.
- Do exercises: B6/ P5; C2/ P6+7- workbook)

- Prepare: Communication Page 11- textbook.
Preparation day: / 8/ 2015

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

Period 5

LESSON 4: COMMUNICATION

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about school

activities, subjects, their friends and give nice sentences about friends

- Skills:+ Speaking: Talk about school activities, subjects and what Ss do at school.
+ Writing: write more questions to ask friends.

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does C2- workbook page 6+ 7
- S2: Write new words

2. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

Chatting: Do you live near here? How do you go to school every day? Who do you often
go to school with?

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read new

words, identify their meanings and use
them to make sentences.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/
example.

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember
*Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

I. Vocabulary

- pocket money['pɔkit,mʌni]: tiền tiêu vặt
- share /ʃeə r / : chia sẻ
- remember /rɪˈmem.bər / : nhớ
- help /help/ : giúp đỡ
- classmate /ˈklɑːs.meɪt/ : bạn cùng lớp
- keep quiet /kiːp kwaɪət /: giữ yên lặng
- talk /tɔːk/ : nói chuyện
- travel /ˈtræv. ə l/ : đi lại

Activity 2: Speaking ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to know how to make friends
and what questions are suitable to ask a
new friend at school.

* Process:
* Pre- speaking:

- T asks Ss how they often make friends,
what they often say when they first meet
a new friend….

T: How do you make friends? When you

make friend, what questions do you ask

II. Speak

1. Game: Making friends

Read and tick (√) the question you think 
are suitable to ask a new friend at school

1. Are you from around here?
2. Do you like pop music?

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

first?

* While- speaking

- Ask SS to work in pair to do task 1 page
11.

- Ss share question with their friends.
- Ask SS to work individually to make

one or two more questions and share with
the class.

* Post- speaking:

- T divides class into 6 groups.
- Ss practice asking and giving the
answers with Yes/No.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks.

5. Are you hungry?
6. Do you play football?

7. How do you get to school every day?
8. Where do you go shopping?

Suitable questions: 1, 2, 4, 4, 7

2. There is a quiz for students in the new 
school newsletter. Read the questions.
Work in groups. Take turn to interview the 
others. Use the questions.

Activity 3: Further practice ( 8 minutes)
*Aims:

- SS further practice speaking skill by

using the guided questions to tell about
their friends.

*Process:

- Ask Ss to work individually to use
the questions and give nice sentences
about friends.

- Call 2-3 SS to present in front of the
class.

- Ask SS to give remarks.
- T corrects if necessary.
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice
speaking skill.

III. Further practice

Class presentation. Are they good friends in
class? Tell the class about them.

Eg:

Lan remembers all her new classmates’
names.

Minh always helps teacher in the class.

Ha shares things with his classmates.
………
………

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: talk about school activities, subjects, their friends
and give nice sentences about friends.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words.

- Write 5 sentences telling about your friends.
- Do exercises: C1/ P6; D2/ P7+8- workbook)
- Prepare: Skill 1 Page 12- textbook.

Preparation day: 16/ 8/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 8/ 2015 6B: ……/ 8/ 2015 6E: ……/ 8/ 2015

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

Period 6

LESSON 5: SKILL 1

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get information about the

three schools PLC SYDNEY, VINABRITA and AN LAC schools and then do the

exercises relating to the reading.

- Skills:+ Reading: read the information about the three schools and get the main idea.
+ Speaking: Choose the school you would like to go to and discuss the reason why.
- Attitude: To teach SS to be hard working, love their school and friends.

II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, extra board.
- Equipment:

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does C1- workbook page 6 - S2: Write new words
- S3: does D2- workbook page 8

2. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

T lets Ss look at the three pictures on page 12- textbook then encourages Ss to give their
ideas.

The first picture is about ………. The second picture ……… The third picture ………
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: Ss know how to read new

words, get their meanings.

*Process:

- Teach vocabulary: translation/
example/ pictures

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember
*Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

I. Vocabulary

- boarding school (n) ['bɔ:diη'sku:l]: trường
nội trú

- college (n) ['kɔlidʒ]: Trường đại học

- surround (v) [sə'raund]: bao quanh

- field (n) [fi:ld]: cánh đồng

- equipment (n) [i'kwipmənt]: trang thiết bị

- modern (a) ['mɔdən] : hiện đại

- creative (a) [kri:'eitiv] : sang tạo

- international (a) [,intə'næ∫ənl]: Quốc tế

Activity 2: Reading ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to get information
about the three school and do
some exercises.

* Process:
* Pre- reading:

- True/ false predictions
* While- reading

- Ask SS to read the three texts
and check true/ false

predictions.
- Feedback.

II. Read

1. True/ False predictions:

a. PLC is a school for boys in Sydney.

b. There are about 1,250 students from the age of four
to age eighteen go to PLC school.

c. An Lac is a small school with nearly 200 students.
d. There are mountains and rivers near An Lac school.
e. Children at the age of ten can go to VINABRITA
school.

f. There are many interesting clubs in VINABRITA
school.

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- Ask SS to read the texts
again and do the task 2.
- Ask SS to read the texts
again and do the task 3 in
group of four.

* Post- speaking:

- T divides class into 6
groups.

- Ss practice asking and giving
the answers with Yes/No.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do
the tasks.

c. F (rivers- > green fields)

d. T e. T

2. Now find these words in the text. What do they 
mean?

- boarding school is a school where students live and
study.

- surrounded: to be everywhere around something .
- international: involving more than one country.
- creative: producing or using original and unusual
ideas.

3. Now read the text again and complete the sentences
1. boarding 2. Vinabrita

3. Australia 4. mountain
5. English speaking teachers
Activity 3: Speaking ( 8 minutes)
*Aims: - SS further practice speaking skill by

giving the reasons why they like or dislike the
three schools.

*Process:

* Pre- speaking:

- T guide SS to do the task; SS read the text
again and complete the table.

* While- speaking: - Complete the table

- Based on the table, ask SS to present their
ideas in front of the class.

- T gives the remarks.
* Post- speaking:

- Ask SS to choose one of the three schools if
they have chance to go and give the reason
why.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice speaking
skill by completing the tasks.

III. Speak

1. Complete the table
Name of

school Reasonsyou like you don’tReasons
like
PLC

Vinabrita
An Lac

2. Which school would you like to go 
to? Why?

I would like to go to………
because……

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: information about the three schools PLC
SYDNEY, VINABRITA and AN LAC schools.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart.
- Read the three texts again

- Do exercise D1 / P7- workbook)
- Prepare: Skill 2 Page 13- textbook.

Tổ trưởng duyệt giáo án
Việt Trì, ngày 24 tháng 8 năm 2015

Đào Thúy Anh
Preparation day: 16/ 8/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 8/ 2015 6B: ……/ 8/ 2015 6E: ……/ 8/ 2015

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

SS will be able to write a webpage for their school with good punctuation

and complete listening and writing tasks.

- Skills: + Listening: Listen and choose the correct answers.

+ Writing: correct the punctuation in the sentences, write the correct version and
create a webpage for their school.

- Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does D1- workbook page 7 - S2: writes new words.
2. Warm- up: ( 3minutes)

Play a game: “Slap the board” to remember the words in the last lesson.

3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: SS listen to the tape and do exercise 1 page

13.

*Process:

* Pre listening:

T. asks some Ss some questions about 3 schools in
the last lesson to elicit Ss remember the

information about those schools.
a. Which school do you like to go?
b. Why do you like it?

* While listening.

- T plays the tape twice and asks SS to work
individually to do the task.

- Feedback.

- T plays the tape once more and gives the correct
answers.

* Post- listening:

- Ask SS to retell the information about Susie.
*Conclusion: Almost all the students can complete
the exercise.

I. Listening

Susie is a student at PLC 
Sydney. Listen and choose the 
correct answers.

1. A
2. A
3. B
4. B
5. A
uniform

favorite science

school

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

Activity 2: Writing ( 10 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to have correct
punctuation in their writings:
Capital letters, pauses and endings
using commas, full stops, questions
marks, exclamation marks… and
then they can complete task 2 and 3
on page 13.

* Process:

- Ask SS to look at writing tip on
page 13.

- T explains some words to help SS
to understand the tips.

- Ask SS to work in group to do the
task 2 and 3.

- Feedback: SS go to the board to
give the answers.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know
about the punctuation and complete
the exercises.

II. Writing
1.Writing tip

* Correct punctuation:

- Capital letters for: starting sentences, name, 
days and months, the pronoun and places
- Pause and endings: commas to separate long 
sentences and lists of things. Full stops,

question marks or exclamation marks are put at
the end of sentences.

2. Can you correct the punctuation in these 
sentences?

Answer key.

1. School starts in the 5th September.
2. Does he live in Ha Noi?

3. I’m excited about the first day of school.
4. Are you doing your homework?

5. We’re having an English lesson in class.
3. Correct the passage.

Answer key.

Hi, I’m Phong and I’m from Ho Chi Minh City.
I wear my uniform to school every day. My
favorite teacher is Mr Trung. He teaches me
science.

Activity 3: Production ( 13 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss can create a webpage for their school
with good punctuation.

*Process: T. asks Ss to practice in groups.
- Ss work in groups (6 groups) to write a
paragraph of about 80 words about their
school on a paper based on the guided
questions on page 13/ task 4.

- Correct and give marks

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students can
do the exercises.

4. Create a webpage for your school
THO SON HIGH JUNIOR SCHOOL
is in Viet Tri city, Phu Tho province. It is
a big school with 21 classes and nearly
1000 students from age twelve to sixteen.
It is the school for gifted students of the
city. It has big buildings and modern
equipment. Students learn many subjects
at school. Besides, students can take part
in many activities……

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: good punctuation; how to create a webpage for
school

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Learn writing tip: good punctuation

- Do exercises: D3 + E1 page 8+ 9- workbook
Preparation day: 16/ 8/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 8/ 2015 6B: ……/ 8/ 2015 6E: ……/ 8/ 2015

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit 1

then they can talk about their dream school.

- Skills: + Listening: Listen and write down the words in the correct places.

+ Speaking: role- play the questions and answer with a partner and talk about
their dream school

+ Writing: complete the sentences with the correct form of verbs write about
dream school.

- Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does D2- workbook page 8 - S2: Does E1- page 9 workbook.
2. Warm- up: ( 3minutes)

- Ask SS to give the name of these things:

a) b) c) d) e) f)

a. dictionary b. calculator c. notebook d. pencil sharpener e. compass f. uniform
3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: To help SS to revise some

active words that they need to remember
in unit 1.

*Process:

- Ask SS to work in pair to do the task 2
on page 14.

- Feedback.

- Play the tape. Ask SS to work

individually to do the task 3 on page 14.
- Feedback.

*Conclusion: Almost all the students
can complete the exercises.

I. Vocabulary

1. Task 2. Match the words in A with the 
one in B

A B

1. study
2. do
3. play
4. have

a. the piano
b. Vietnamese
c. exercises
d. breakfast

2. Task 3. Listen. Then write down the
words in the correct places.

1. play: sports, badminton, music
2. do: morning exercise, homework
3. study: new words, geography
4. have: English lessons, a new book
Activity 2: Revising grammar ( 18 minutes)

*Aims: To help SS to revise the present
simple, the present continuous tense by
completing exercises from 4 to 6.

* Process:

II. Grammar
1.

Task 4. Complete the sentences with the
present simple.

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

- Divide class into 3 groups.
- Group 1: do the task 4 p 14.
- Group 2: do the task 5 p 14.
- Group 3: do the task 6 p 14.

- Call 1 S from each group to go to the
board to give the answer.

- T gives the remarks.

- Ask SS to work in pair to do the task 7 p
14.

- Feedback.

- Divide class into 3 groups.

- Group 1: ask and answer questions
about school

- Group 2: talk about things that are fixed
or often happen.

- Group 3: talk about things that are
happening now.

- Call representatives from each group to
present in front of the class.

- T gives remarks.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
exercises.

2. don’t 5. teaches
3. walks 6. plays

2. Task 5. Complete the sentences with the
present continuous.

1. are doing 4. is having
2. are riding 5. am walking
3. Is ___ studying 6. is teaching
3. Task 6. Complete the texts with the
correct form of the verb in brackets.

1. lives 4. is walking
2. is 5. go

3. has 6. study
7. are working 8 loves

4. Task 7. Match the questions with the
correct answer.

b. How many classes are there in your
school?-g. sixteen.

d. How is your first week at school?-f. Oh,
wonderful.

e. Does Mai live near her school?-a. Yes,
she does.

h. What do you do in the evening?
- c. I do my homework and watch TV
5. Task 8 Role-play the questions and 
answers with a partner.

Group 1: A: Where’s your school?
B: It’s in VT City.

A: Is it a big or small school?
B: ………

Group 2: - My school has 26 classes.
- I walk to school every day.
………..
Group 3: - We are learning English now.
- He is having breakfast.

………

Activity 3: Further practice ( 5 minutes)

*Aims: To help SS to discuss and talk
about their dream school.

*Process:

- Ask SS to work in group to discuss about
their dream school.

- Call some SS to give the answer orally
first.

- Call 2- 3 SS to go to the board to write
some sentences about their dream school
based on the questions on page 15.

*Conclusion: Almost all the students talk
and write about their dream school.

III. Writing

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

4. Practice and consolidation:(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: vocabulary and grammar in unit 1.
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn again the present simple and present continuous tense
- Do exercises: E2 page 9- workbook

- Prepare: UNIT 2: GETTING STARTED Page 16+17- textbook.

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 09 / 2015 6B: ……/ 09/ 2015 6E: ……/ 09/ 2015

Period 9

UNIT 2: MY HOME

Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives:

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

- Knowledge:

- Ss will be able to listen to get information about rooms and

furniture in the house

- Vocabulary: Home lexical items

- Grammar: There is / There isn’t. There are / There aren’t

Prepositions of place

- Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation between Mi and Nick with the lexical

items related to the topic "My Home".

+ Reading: Read the conversation and then complete the sentences
+ Speaking: work in pair to create short role- play with the expressions.

+ Writing: Use prepositions of place to describe the positions of furniture in the house.
- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house.

II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: repeat the present simple tense - S2: repeat the present continuous tense
2. Warm- up: ( 3minutes) - Ask SS to play a game “slap the board”

- ask Ss to slap the correct answer as

quickly as possible when teacher gives the questions.
1. What is there behind you?

2. Where do you live?

3. Are there many rooms in your apartment?
4. Do you live with your grandparents?
5. Who do you live with?

6. Where is your kitchen?
3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation ( 7 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,
identify their meanings and use them

to make sentences and know what
they are going to listen.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/
mine/ real object/ translation/
situation

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words
again.

Checking: rub out and remember
- Ask SS to look at the picture and
answer the questions:

+ What are Mi and Nick doing?

I. New words

:

- be‘hind

(prep) ở phía sau, đằng sau

- next to

(prep) ở cạnh

- in front of (prep) ở đằng trước

- be‘tween

(prep) ở giữa

- ‘under

(prep) ở dưới

- move

(v)

di chuyển

- ‘noisy

(adj)

ồn ào, ầm ĩ

a‘partment (n)

căn hộ

- ‘cousin

(n)

anh (em) họ

* True/ False prediction:

Yes, there are

Next to the living

room

No, I don’t

With my parents and

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

+ Who are Vy and Duy?

- Teacher sets the scene: Mi and Nick
are pen friends. They are talking on
kype. Now listen to the conversation
among them.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new
words and what they are going to
listen.

Which family members does Mi talk

about?

grandparents

dad

uncle

mum

aunt

brother

cousin

Activity 2: Practice ( 13 minutes)
*Aims:

- SS get the content of the
conversation among the four people
and then complete the exercises.
* Process:

- Play the tape and ask students to
listen without textbook for the first
time, the second time repeating the
conversation with book.

- Get Ss to repeat in chorus.
- Get Ss to work in group of four.
- Correct their pronunciations.
- Ask SS to work in pair to do true/

false exercise( a).
Feed back.

- Ask Ss to work in group to do
exercise (b)

- Feedback.

T asks Ss if they know the

prepositions in the box. Have Ss

do exercise in pairs.

T calls on some Ss to speak out.

T gets Ss to write the sentences

individually, then share the

sentences with a friend.

T calls on some Ss to write their

answers on the board.

II-Practice:
1. Listen.
2. Read.
3. Practice.

a. Which family members does Mi talk

about?

Key:

grandparents

dad



uncle

mum



aunt



brother



cousin



b. Read the conversation again. Complete

the sentences.

Key:

1. TV – sofa 2. town house

3. sitting on the sofa

4. noisy 5. three

* Prepositions of place.

2. Match the prepositions with the

pictures.

Key:

A. on B. next to C. behind D. in

E. in front of F. between G. under

3. Write a sentence to describe each

picture in2.

Key:

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

Ss look at the picture of the room

and do this exercise individually.

Ss share their answer with a

partner.

T confirms the correct answers.

T checks the sentences with the

whole class.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can
understand the conversation and
complete the exercises.

G. The cat is under the table.

4. Look at the picture and write true (T)

or false (F) for each sentence. Correct the

false one.

Key:

1. F (The dog is between the bookshelf and

the bed.)

2. T

3. F (The clock is between the picture.)

4. F (The cat is in front of the kennel.)

5. F (The cap is next to the pillow.)

6. T

Activity 3: Production ( 10 minutes)
*Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and
writing skill by doing some
exercises.

*Process:

- Ask Ss to close their books, Ss

work in pairs. T asks the

questions, T writes the points on

the board.

T confirms the correct answers

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can make
dialogues and write the poem.

III. Further practice:

5. Look at the picture again. Answer the

questions.

Key:

1. They are on the desk./ bookshelf.

2. They are on the floor.

3. Yes, it is.

4. No, they aren’t. They’re on the bed.

5. It’s behind the bookshelf.

6. No, it isn’t. It’s next to the desk.

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the conversation; some expressions and review
the words about school things.

- Guide SS to learn new words: learning tip.
5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart.
- Read the conversation again.

- Do exercises: A; B ( page 10+ 11- workbook)+ Translate the conversation in Getting 
started into Vietnamese. Việt Trì, ngày tháng năm 2015
- Prepare: A closer look 1. Tổ trưởng duyệt giáo án

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / 9/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ 9/ 2015

UNIT 2: MY home

Period 10

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I- Objectives:

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Ss will be able to
pronounce correct the sounds /z /, /s/ and / iz/ in isolation and in context; Ss can know

some furniture and tools in the home.
- Vocabulary: Home lexical items

- Grammar: There is / There isn’t - There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place

- Skills: + Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /z /,
/s/ and / iz/ they hear.

+ Writing: use the verbs and words given to make phrases, use the words given to
complete the sentences, write more sentences about yourself.

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: to go to the board to write new words, make 2 sentences with the words.
- S2: does B1 ( p10 workbook)

2. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

- ask Ss to play a game “Jumbled words”

1. broaomth = bathroom 2.lvniig room= livingroom 3. Hlal = hall
4. Kcehitn = kitchen 5. aictt = attic 6. bdeorom = bedroom
3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 20 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,
identify their meanings and use them
to make sentences and do some
exercises relating these words and
phrases.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/
mine/ visual aids/ translation/ situation
- T: writes new words on the board.

- SS: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember
-Have Ss quickly match the room
with its names.

T checks the answer quickly

* Practice:- Ss work in pairs to do this
activity.

- T writes the names of the rooms on
the board, in different places.

- T calls on Ss from different pairs to
go to the board and write the name of

I. Vocabulary

physic (n) : môn vật lý

- 'cupboard (n) tủ ly, tủ chén

- hall (n) phòng lớn

- chest of drawers (n) ngăn kéo tủ
- air conditioner (n) điều hòa
- ‘microwave (n) lị vi sóng

- ‘dishwasher (n) máy rửa bát đĩa

- ‘attic (n) gác xép

1. Look at the house below. Name the 
rooms of the house.

Key:

a. living room b. bedroom
c. attic d. bathroom
e. kitchen f. hall

2. Name the things in each room in 1. Use 
the word list below.

Key:

living room lamp, sofa, picture, table.
bedroom bed, lamp, picture, chest of

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

the furniture under these rooms. Ask
other Ss to comment.

- T can organize a competition.
Whichever pair finishes this activity
first will be the winner.

Ss listen and repeat the words.

- T asks Ss to work in pairs and calls
some pairs to practice in front of the
class.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new
words and complete the exercises.

kitchen fridge, cupboard, cooker,
table, dishwasher, chair.
bathroom bath, sink, toilet.

hall picture

3. Listen and repeat the words.

4. Think of a room . In pairs, ask and 
answer questions to get the room.
 Example:

A: What’s in the room?
B: A sofa and a television.
A: Is it the living room?
B : Yes.

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation ( 10 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to learn and practice the

sounds /z/, /s/ and /iz/

* Process:

- Play the tape one time, book
closed.

- Play the tape twice, book open, and
ask SS to repeat.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read again.

- Play the tape in exercise 6 and ask
SS to work individually to put the
words into two groups.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know
pronounce the 2 sounds and identify
them in the words and sentences.

II Pronunciation: /z/, /s/ and /iz/

1. Listen and repeat the words.

lamps posters sinks fridges
tables wardrobes toilets beds
2. Listen again and put the words in the 
correct column.

Key:

/ Z/ /S/ /IZ/

posters, tables
wardrobes, beds

lamps,
sinks, toilets

fridges
Rules:

- /Z/ : Final- s is pronounced /z/ after voiced
sounds : b, d, g, n, m, l, v, r,……

Eg : beds, dogs, cans, rooms,…..

- /S/ : Final- s is pronounced /s/ after voiceless
sounds : /p/, /k/, /t/, /f/, / /

Eg : cats, lamps, books, months.

- /IZ/ : Final-es is pronounced /iz/ after :
/s/, /z /, /I∫ /, /t∫ /, / dӡ /

Eg : buses, houses, watches, pages….
4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and phrases.

- Ask SS to do exercise A1,2( workbook- page 10)

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart.

- Practice pronouncing the sounds /z/, /s/ and /iz/and read all exercises in pronunciation in
textbook (page 19) again.

- Prepare: A closer look 2/ Page 19+ 20- textbook
Preparation day: / 9/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ 9/ 2015

UNIT 2: MY home

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to

use the structures:

There is/ There isn’t.
There are/ There aren’t

- Write a description about a room/ house and furniture

- Skills:+ Listening: Listen to get information about school activities.

+ Speaking: Talk about school activities, subjects and what Ss do at school.

+ Reading: Read for specific information about schools, and read e-mails and web

pages.

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their home .
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (4 minutes)

- S1: Does B4- workbook page 11 - S2: Does B5 – workbook page 11
2. Warm- up: ( 2 minutes)

- Ask Ss to play games “spot the difference”
3- New lesson: (35 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching structure ( 12 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to use there is,

there are fluetly
*Process:

T uses suitable techniques to
present the structures. There is/ There
isn’t. There are/ There aren’t

T asks Ss to look at the two pictures of
the two rooms in the grammar box or
T can prepare two pictures of two
rooms with some furniture removed
from the second room. Ask Ss what
the second room does not have.
T writes Ss’answers on the board.
T gives the forms:

* Checking the understanding:
Substitution drills.

*Conclusion: - Almost all the
students understand structure and do
exercises fluently.

I. Structure:

Compare the two pictures.

Positive Negative
There is a picture on

the wall.

There isn’t a picture
on the wall.

There are two lamps

in the room. There aren’t two lamps in the room.
Positive: There is + (a/ an) + N +…
 There are + Ns +…

Negative: There isn’t + (a/an) + N +..
 There aren’t + Ns +….
Y/N Question:

Is there + (a/an) + N +…?
Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t.
Are there + Ns +…?

Yes, there are/ No, There aren’t.
Activity 2: Practice ( 18 minutes)

*Aims:

- Ss practice the present simple tense
and the present continuous tense by
completing the exercises.

III. Practice

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

*Process:

- Ss do the task 1 individually (in 3
ms)

- T. calls some Ss to say their
answers

- T. gives explanation and answer
keys.

Ss can write different sentences.
Accept these sentences if they are
make sense.

Ss write the sentences individually
and go to the board to write their
sentences.

T feedbacks.

Ss look at the picture and complete
the description. Ss compare their
answers.

T confirms the correct answers
-Feedback.

- Ss work individually to do task 6.
- Feedback.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can
complete the exercises.

1. is 2. are 3. are 4. is 5. are

2. Make the sentences in 1 negative.

1. isn’t 2. aren’t 3. aren’t 4. isn’t 5.
aren’t

3. Write positive and negative .
Key:

1. There is/ isn’t a TV on the table.

2. There is/ isn’t a brown dog in the kitchen.
3. There is/ isn’t a boy in front of the cupboard.
4. There is/ isn’t a bath in the bathroom.

5. There are / aren’t lamps in the bedroom.

4. Write : is/ isn’t, are/ aren’t in each blank

to describe the kitchen in Mi’s house.

1. is 2. is 3. are 4. are 5. aren’t
6. isn’t.

5. Complete the questions.
Key:

1. Is there a fridge in the kitchen?
2. Is there a TV in the bedroom?

3. Are there four chairs in your living room?
4. Is there a desk next to your bed?

5. Are there two sinks in your bathroom?

Activity 4: Production (5minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to use there is, there
are correctly by ask and answer the
questions in 5 .

*Process:

Ss work in pairs, ask and answer the
questions.

T goes around to observe Ss working.
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can do the
exercises.

IV. Further practice

6. In pairs, ask and answer the questions in 
5. Report your partner’s answers to the 
class.

Example :

A: Are there two bathrooms in your house?
B : Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t.

7.Work in pairs. Ask your partner about his
/ her room……

- Where’s your room?

- What’s your favorite room?
4. Practice and consolidation: (2 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: there is, there are
5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Ask Ss to learn grammar structures by heart.
- Do exercises: C3/ P14; E1/ P15- workbook)
- Prepare: Communication Page 20, 21 textbook
Preparation day: / 9/ 2015

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

Period 12

LESSON 4: COMMUNICATION

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to
- talk about and describing houses, rooms and furniture.

- draw a simple plan of their house.

- Skills:+ Speaking: to describe different types of house.

+ Writing: write more questions to ask friends.

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does C2- workbook page 6+ 7
- S2: Write new words

2. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

* Chatting :T asks Ss some questions about their houses.
- Where do you live?

- Do you live in a house or an apartment?
- How many rooms are there in your house?

- What are there in your living room?/ kitchen/ bedroom?...
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read

new words, identify their meanings
and use them to make sentences.
*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary:
translation/ example.

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words
again.

Checking: rub out and remember
*Conclusion: - Almost all the
students know new words and how
to use them.

I. Vocabulary

Stilt house (n): nhà sàn
'villa (n): nhà biệt thự
town house (n) nhà ở thành phố
country house (n) nhà ở nông thôn

Activity 2: Speaking ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to know how to make
friends and what questions are
suitable to ask a new friend at

II. Speak

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

school.
* Process:

Ss look at the picture and do this
exercise individually or in pairs.
- T feedbacks orally.

- Before Ss do this activity, model
the way to do this with a St. The
conversation could be:

T : ( look at Nick’s house)
S : ( look at Mi’s house)
T :

S :

T asks Ss in each pair not to look at
each other’s picture to make similar
conversations.

Ss should note down the differences
between the two houses. After some
minutes, the pair which has the most

differences will be the winner.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the
tasks.

Key:

1. country
2. are

3. is
4. are

5. on
7. next to
8. on
9. is

2. Student A looks at the pictures of Nick’s 
house on this page. Student B looks at the 
pictures of Mi’s house on the page 25. Find 
the differences between the two house.
Eg :

A : Nick lives in a country house. Where does
Mi live?

B : She lives in a house

A : How many rooms are there in Mi’s house?
B : There are six rooms. What about Nick’s
house?

A :………

3. Draw a simple plan of your house. (P21)

Activity 3: Further practice ( 8 minutes)
*Aims:

T calls on some Ss to describe their
friend’s house to the class.

*Process:

Ss may also present the differences
between their house and their friend’s.
Other Ss and T listen and give comments.
- Ask SS to give remarks.

- T corrects if necessary.
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice
speaking skill.

III. Further practice

4. Describe their friend’s house to the

class.

Eg :

I have a close friend. Her name is Hoa.
She lives in a country house. There are five
rooms in her house. ………

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: structures with there is/ are, describe different
types of house

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Ask Ss to learn new words.

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ 9/ 2015

UNIT 2: MY home

Period 13

LESSON 5: SKILL 1

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: - students can read for specific information about some crazy houses,
some rooms, furniture.

- Describe the houses and rooms they know.

- Vocabulary: Home lexical items
- Grammar: There is / There isn’t

There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place

- Skills:+ Reading: read the information about the hotel and get the main idea.

+ Speaking: Choose a room you would like to stay and discuss the reason why.
- Attitude: To teach SS to be hard working, love their home.

II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, extra board.
- Equipment:

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does C1- workbook page 6 - S2: Write new words
- S3: does D2- workbook page 8

2. Warm- up: ( 3 minutes)

- ask Ss to play game “slap on the board”
wardrobe lamp dishwasher
picture cupboard

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 5 minutes)
*Aims: Ss know how to read new words,

get their meanings.
*Process:

- Teach vocabulary: translation/ example/
pictures

- T: writes new words on the board.

- SS: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember
*Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

I. Vocabulary

- crazy (a): kỳ dị, lạ thường
- strange (a): lạ

- shape (n): hình dạng
- messy(a): lộn xộn, bừa bãi

Activity 2: Reading ( 17 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to get information about “A
room at the crazy House, Da Lat”
and do some exercises.

II. Read

1. Answer the questions.
1.It’s an e-mail.

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

* Process:
* Pre- reading:

- Answer the questions.
* While- reading

- Asks sts to read the Study skills box.
Explains any words that sts don’t know.
- Ss quickly look at the text and answer the
questions. Asks for sts’ answers. Confirm
the answers to question 1 and 2, answers to
question 3 are open.

Sts read the text quickly again to check their
ideas from 1.

- Sts read the text in detail to answer the
questions. Sts can underline parts of the

email that help them with the answers. Set a
strict time limit to ensure sts read quickly
for information.

- Sts compare their answers before giving
the answers to teacher. Asks them to give
evidence when giving the answers.

* Post- speaking:

- Sts do the exercise then compare their
answers.

- Teacher checks the answers.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks.

House, Da Lat”

- The topic is Nick’s weekend at a
crazy house hotel.

3.3 things you know about Da Lat:
- The weather in Da Lat is very nice.
- There is a Xuan huong lake…
- There are a lot of flowers and they
are very beautiful…..

2. Quickly read the text. Check your

ideas from 1.

3. Read the text again and answer the 
questions.

1. No, he isn’t.

2. There are ten rooms.

3. Because there is a big tiger on the
wall.

4. It’s under the bed.

4. Are these things in the room?
There are:

a window a lamp
a tiger a shelf
a desk

Activity 3: Speaking ( 8 minutes)
*Aims: - SS further practice speaking skill by

giving the reasons why they like or dislike the
three schools.

*Process:

* Pre- speaking:

- T guide SS to do the task

* While- speaking: - Each sts creates a new
room for the hotel and draws a plan of the room.
- Sts show the plan to a partner. Sts describe
their rooms in pairs.

* Post- speaking:- Some sts show their partner’s
plan to the whole class and describe it. Other sts
and Teacher listen and vote for the best plan.
Asks sts to keep their plans for the next lesson.
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice speaking
skill by completing the tasks.

III. Speak

5. Create a new room for the hotel. 
Draw a plan of the room.

6. Show your plan to your partner 
then describe the room to other 
students in the class.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes) 
- Describe their houses.

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

- Describe Nick’s room at the hotel again.

- Prepare: Skill 2.

Preparation day: / 9/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ 9/ 2015
UNIT 1: MY home

Period 14 LESSON 6: SKILL 2
I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: Listen to get information about the room at the hotel and draw the
furniture in the correct place.

- Write an email to their friends.

- Skills: + Listening: Listen and draw the furniture in the correct place
+ Writing: write an email to a friend

- Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love their house.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does D1- workbook page - S2: writes new words.
2. Warm- up: ( 3minutes)

Teacher asks sts about the content of the previous lesson. T may ask sts to describe the
Nick’s room in the hotel.

Sts describe the Nick’s room in the hotel

(or: sts can describe their houses – They are ready at home)
3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: SS listen to the tape and do exercise

1 page 13.
*Process:

* Pre listening: Orders Sts draw the furniture
in the correct place by themselves

* While-listening:

- Sts listen to the tape twice .

- Allows sts to draw the furniture in the
correct place as they listen.

- Sts can share their answers before T plays

the tape a final time to follow pairs to check
their answers.

* Post listening: T asks sts to guess where to
put the furniture first, plays the tape for sts to
check their guess. If time allows asks sts to
describe Nick’s parents’ room again).
*Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercise.

I. Listening

1. Listen and draw the furniture in 
the correct place.

Nick’s Mum: Nick’s staying in the
tiger room. We are staying in the Bear
room There is a big bear near the door.
The bear is actually a fireplace. In the
far corner, there is a window. The
shelves are right in front of it. Next to
the shelves is a big bed. There is a
wardrobe next to the bed.

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

Activity 2: Writing ( 10 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to explains how to write an
email to a friends

* Process:

* Pre writing:- Sts read carefully the
writing tips box.

- Explains how to write an email to a
friends: Asks sts some questions:

? How many parts are there in an email to
your friends?

? What are they?

? What should you remember when
writing each part?

While writing.

Sts look at Nick’s email on page on 22 and
identify the parts.

- Sts do exercise in pairs.

T can write this email on a large-sized
piece of paper and ask one st to go to the
board to do this exercise. It would be
easier to correct sts’ answers this way.
 Post writing.

- Sts close their books. Sts work in groups

to do this activity (go through all three
steps). T goes around to observe. Give
each group a big sized piece of paper to
write their email.

One or two groups to stick their finished
email on the board, Other sts and T. give
comments. St edits and revises their
writing as homework.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know about the
punctuation and complete the exercises.

II. Writing.

In an email, there are 5 parts:

1.Subject.(What the email about is?)
2.Begin with a greeting.(Dear, Hello… )
3.Introduction (is the first paragraph…)
4.Body (each subject is a new paragraph)
5.Conclusion (last paragraph)

2. Read Nick’s email. Identify the parts 
of it:

Subject: Weekend away
Greeting: Hi Phong………

Introduction: How are you………crazy.
Body: …

Conclusion:……

3. Read the email and correct it.
From:…

To ….

Subject: My house
Hi Sophia,

Thanks for your email. Now I’ll tell you
about my house.

I live with my parents and younger
brother in a town house. It’s big. There
are six rooms: a living room, a kitchen,
two bedrooms, and two bathrooms. I like
my bedroom best. We are moving to an
apartment soon.

What about you? Where do you live?
Tell me in your next email.

Best wishes,
Activity 3: Production ( 13 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss can write an email and tell him about
your idea for the new room of the Crazy
House hotel

*Process:

- Or: sts write their email individually. One
st write the email on the board. other st and
T comment the email. Then T collects some
emails to correct at home)

- Correct and give marks
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can do the

4. Write an email to Nick. Tell him 
about your idea for the new room of 
the Crazy House hotel.

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

exercises.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)
- Retell the main content of the lesson
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Write an email to your friend and tell him about your room / house.

- Be ready “Looking back and project” - Prepare: Looking back + project.

Preparation day: / 9/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ 9/ 2015

UNIT 1: MY home

Period 15

LESSON 7: LOOKING BACK + PROJECT

I- Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: SS will be able to revise all the target knowledge in unit 2 and do a project
about their favourite house.```````````````

- Skills: + Listening: Listen and write down the words in the correct places.

+ Speaking: role- play the questions and answer with a partner and talk about
their dream school

+ Writing: complete the sentences with the correct form of verbs write about
dream school.

- Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love their school and friends.
II- Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III- Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)

- S1: Does E2- workbook page 15 - S2: Does E2- page 15 workbook.
2. Warm- up: ( 3minutes)

- Asks Ss to play “Brainstorming”

Two sts go to the board and write the words they know about the house the person who
writes more words is winner.

3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: To help SS to revise some

active words that they need to remember
in unit 2.

*Process:

- Sts do this activity individually then
compare their answers with a partner.
- T asks for sts’ answer or asks 1 st to

1. Put the words into the correct groups.
G1(type of building): villa, apartment, town

house, stilt house, country house.... cottage,
farmhouse, bungalow...

G2 (rooms): living room, hall, bathroom, 
bedroom, kitchen, attic.... dining room,
Type of

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

write his answer on the board.

- Ask sts to work in groups to add more
words to each group. The group that can
add the most words to the list will be the
winner.(Or: Group competition game...)
*Conclusion: Almost all the students
can complete the exercises.

guestroom, utility room...

G3 (furniture): picture, cupboard, chest of
drawers, wardrobe, sofa, dishwasher,
desk....stool, armchair...

Activity 2: Revising grammar ( 18 minutes)
*Aims: To help SS to revise the

preposition of place and There is/ are by
completing exercises from 4 to 6.

* Process:

- Sts look at the pictures and do this
exercise individually.

- Asks some sts to write the sentences on
the board.

- Checks sts’ answers.

- Sts do this exercise individually them
compare their answers with a partner.
Check sts’ answers

- Sts do this exercise individually them
compare their answers with a partner.
Some sts write their answers on the
board.

- Check sts’ answers

- Sts do this exercise individually them
compare their answers with a partner.
Some sts write their answers on the
board.

- Check sts’ answers
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
exercises.

II. Grammar

a. Make the sentences.

1. The boy is on the table,.

2. The dog is in front of the kennel
3. The cat is between the bookshelf

and the sofa.

4. The cat is behind the computer.
5. The girl is in the armchair.
6. The boy is next to the armchair.
b. Look at the picture and complete the 
sentences:

1. There is a clock on the wall
2. There are books...

3. There is a desk...

4. There aren’t two posters....
5. There is a laptop...

6. There aren’t three small plants....
c. Turn the sentences in Ex 3 into 
questions:

1. Is there a clock on the wall?

2. Are there books...?

3. Is there a desk...?
4. Are there two posters....?
5. Is there a laptop....?.

6. Are there three small plants....?
Activity 3: Further practice ( 5 minutes)

*Aims: To help SS to describe about
their bedroom.

*Process:

- Ask SS to work in group to discuss
about their bedroom.

- Call some SS to give the answer orally
first.

- Call 2- 3 SS to go to the board to write
some sentences about their bedroom
based on the questions on page 15.
*Conclusion: Almost all the students
describe their bedroom.

III. Writing

d. Write six sentences to describe your 
bedroom:

6. Work in groups. Take turns to draw a 
cat in the house below. Other sts ask 
questions to find the cat.

PROJECT.

1. Which house do you want to live in?
Why?

2. Sts draw their own crazy house and tell
the group about the house.

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

- Retell the main content of the lesson: vocabulary and grammar in unit 2.
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn again the prepositions of place and there is/are and do exercises.
- Prepare: UNIT 3: GETTING STARTED Page 16+17- textbook.

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015
 Tổ trưởng duyệt giáo án

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 16

LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the

conversation on page 26 and use the adjectives to talk about personality; to learn

polite requests and suggestions.

- Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation among Phuc, Duong, Chau and

Mai and get the main information.

+ Reading: Read the conversation and then complete the sentences.

+ Speaking: Make polite requests and suggestions.

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: Make sentences using the words:

fridge/bed/ wardrobe/ chest of drawers/ sink

and the prepositions of place:

in front of/ behind/ between/ on/ in the middle of.

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

- Ask SS to look at picture on page 26 (getting started) and answer some

questions:

How many people are there? What are they doing?

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new works, identify

their meanings and use them to make

sentences and know what they are going to

listen.

* Process:

Pre -teach vocabulary: translation/ situation

- T: Writes new words on the board

- SS: Listen and repeat in individual first then

the whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 SS to read the words again

Checking: Rub out and remember

- T: Asks SS to do true/ false prediction

* Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new words

and what they are going to listen.

I. New words

Picnic: đi dã ngoại

Friendly: thân thiện

Talkative: Hay nói, ba hoa

Confident: Tự tin

Shy: nhút nhát

Hard wking: Siêng năng, chăm chỉ

* True/ False prediction:

1. Mai and Chau are having a

picnic

2. Lucas is a friendly dog

3. Mai has glasses and long black

hair

4. Mai and Chau are working on

their school project tonight.

5. Phuc is going to judo club with

his brother.

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)

* Aims:

- SS get the content of the

conversation among the four people

and the complete the exercises.

* Process:

- Play the tape and ask students to

listen without textbook for the first

time, the second time listen the

conversation with book open.

- Get Ss to repeat in chorus.

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

1. F (Mai & Chau > Phong& Duy)

2. T

3. F (Mai > Chau)

4. T

5. F (Phuc > Duong)

a) Put a suitable word in each blank

1. picnic

4. Mai and Chau

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

- Get Ss to work in group of four

- Correct their pronunciation

- Aks Ss to work in pair to check

true/false prediction.

- Feed back

- Ss work in pair to do task (a)

- Feedback

- Role -play the sort conversations

- Ask Ss to work in pair to do

exercise (b)

- Feedback

- T. divides class into two groups

- Ss play game. “Lucky number”

- T. explains how to play the game

- Ss practice saying the adjectives

- Ss read adjectives

- T. plays the recording to allow Ss to

check their answer

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can

understand the conversation and

complete the exercises.

3. friendly 6. Working on their school

Project

b. Polite requests and suggestions

Making and responding to a request

1. Can you pass the biscuits for me, please?

2. Yes, sure

Making and responding to a suggestion

1. Would you like to sit down?

2. Oh, sorry. We can’t

2. Game: “Lucky number”

1. pass the pen

4. listen to music

2. play outside

5. turn on the light

3. move the chair

6. have a picnic

* 1, 2, 3 ask for help

Eg. A. Can you______please?

B. Yes, sure

* 2, 4, 6 make a suggestion

Eg: A. Would you like to_____?

B. Yes, I’d love to./

3. Adjectives for personality

1. Creative

4. talkative

2. Kind

5. Clever

3. Confident

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and

writing skill by doing some exercises

* Process:

- Ask SS to work in pair to complete

task 4

- Call 6 SS to give the answer arally.

- Give the remarks if necessary

- Ask SS to work in group of four, T

explains the rule of the game.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete

the tasks.

III. Further practice

1. am

2. is

3. Isn’t

4. aren’t

5. Is

6. Are

2. Task 5: Friendship Flower

4. Practice and consolidation:

(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson:

adjectives to talk about personality; polite

requests and suggestions, the content of the conversation among Phuc, Duong,

Chau and Mai.

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

- Learn new works by heart

- Read the conversation again

- Do exercises B2 - B3 (page 17 - workbook) + Translate the conversation in

Getting started into Vietnamese

- Prepare: Unit 3: A closer look 1/ page 28 -textbook

Preparation day: / 9/ 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 9/ 2015 6B: ……/ 9/ 2015 6E: ……/ 9/ 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 17

LESSON 2: A CLSER LOOK 1

. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

- Knowledge: Pronounce correctly the sounds /b/ and /p/ in isolation and in

context; use the vocabulary and structure about body parts, appearance, and

personality.

- Skills: Listening, Speaking, writing

- Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: to go to the board to write new words

S2: does B3 in workbook (p17)

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (10 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings.

* Process:

- Teach new words: visual aids/

translation/ pictures

- T: writes new words on the board

- Ss: Listen and repeat in individual first

then the whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 Ss to read the words again

- Checking: rub out and remember

- Ask Ss to match the words they know.

(task 2 page 28)

- Ask Ss to work in group. Point out

irregular plurals using the “watch out”

box.

- T plays the tape to support Ss

pronunciation

- T tests Ss comprehension by asking

them to respond to imperative sentences,

eg: “Touch your elbow”.

- T explains that some words go together,

eg: long hair.

- Write the adjectives on the board and

allow Ss to attach vocabulary cards to

make matches.

- Ask Ss to complete the word webs in

I. Vocabulary

1. New words

- blonde (adj): (tóc) vàng hoe

- curly (adj): xoăn

- straight (adj): thẳng

- chubby (adj): mũm mĩn

* Watch out!

2. Create word webs

- long/ short: legs, arms, tail, hair

- big/small: head, hands, ears, feet,

eyes, nose.

- black/blonde/ curly/ straight: hair,

fur.

- clubby: face, cheeks

- round/long: face

Parts of the body

leg

foot

Hand

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

their books

* Conclusion: Students know new words

and complete the exercises.

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation (13 minutes)

* Aims:

Hepl Ss to learn and practice the

sounds /p/ and /b/.

* Process:

- Have the Ss practive the /p/ and /b/

sounds together.

- Explain: /b/ is a voiced sound so you

should hear, but not the voiceless

sound /p/.

- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and

repeat

- Have SS practice reading the words in

pairs first.

- Ask Ss to do the task while listening to

the tape.

- Ask Ss to listen while T plays the tape.

Clap hands to help SS to understand the

rhythm.

- Play the tape again and ask SS to chant

along

- Divide the class into 2 groups. Have

groups sing alternative lines.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know

pronounce the sounds: /b/ and /p/ in

isolation and in context

II. Pronunciation: Sounds /b/ and

/p/

1. Listen and repeat the words

2. Listen and circle the words you

hear

1. Play

2. band

3. ponytail

4. brown

5. Picnic

6. pretty

3. listen. Then practice the chant

Activity 3: Teaching grammar (7 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss to learn the verb have for

description.

* Process:

- Stick some pictures of people on the

board and call out a description, eg: She

has long hair. He has around face.

- Have Ss touch the appropriate picture

while repeating the sentence

- Point to the pictures and form the

sentences: Does he have short hair?

- Have Ss make the sentences

individually

III. Grammar

1. Look at the cover page of 4 teen

magazine and make the sentences.

1. Does the girl have short hair?

- No, she doesn’t

2. Does Harry Potter have big eyes?

3. the dog has a long tail

4. And you, do you have a round face?

- Yes, I do/No, I don’t

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- Have Ss to work in pair to do the task

6 page 29

- Use questions to elicit vocabulary

about the pictures to help Ss predict the

content of the recording.

- Play the tape, ask Ss to match the

pictures to the people.

- Have SS to discuss the answers, ask Ss

to recall parts of the recording that help

them to do the matching

- Ask Ss to fill in the gaps by recalling

the recording and using the information

in the grammar input box.

- Play the tape to allow Ss to check their

answers.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand

and use Have for description

Phuc. c

Duong. a

Mai. b

3. Listen and write IS or HAS

1. has 2. Is 3. Has 4. Is

5. has 6. is

4. Practice and consolidation:

(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson:

the sounds /b/ and/p/ in isolation and in

context; the vocabulary and structure about body parts, appearance, and

personality.

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do ex A1, A2, B1, B4, page 16, 17, 18 workbook

- Prepare unit 3: Closer look 2 -page 29, 30 textbook

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 18

LESSON 3: A CLSER LOOK 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

- Knowledge: - Use the present continuous to talk about future plans and

arrangements.

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

- Attitude: To teach SS to be polite and love their friends

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: goes to the board to write new words

2: does B1 page 17 in workbook

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Slap the board:

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings.

* Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/

synonym/ translation/ situation.

- T: writes new words on the board

- SS: listen and repeat in individual

first then the whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 SS to read the words again

Checking: Rub out and remember

* Conclusion: Students know new

words and complete the exercises.

I. Vocabulary

Future plan (n): kế hoạch tương lai.

Finish (v) = end (v): kết thúc

Take a rest (v) = have a rest (v) = rest

(v): nghỉ ngơi

Museum (n): bảo tàng

Barbecue (n): món thịt nướng

Barbecue

Invite (v): Mời

Decide (v): quyết định

Activity 2: Presentation (10 minutes)

* Aims:

Help Ss to learn how to use the present

continuous tense to talk about future

plan and arrangements and identify and

practice the language of polite

requests.

* Process:

- Ask Ss to recall what happened in the

conversation in getting started (focus

on the verbs that were used)

II. Grammar

1. The present continuous tense

- To talk about future plan

Eg: I am not coming tonight. I am busy.

This evening, we are watching TV.

Hair

Tail

Round

Straight

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and

follow the conversation on the page.

Play the tape again and ask SS to

underline all the verbs.

- Use the grammar box to help teacher

explain that some ING verbs describe

actions happening now, and some

describe plans for the future.

- Point out contextual clues, such as

adverbs of time:

this evening/

tomorrow.

- Point out that some verbs lose their

final “e” when - ing is added, eg:

coming/ writing/inviting/taking/ riding.

2. Making suggestions

S1: Would you like to go to my party on

Saturday?

S2: I’d love to

Oh, I am sorry, I can’t

Activity 3: Practice (15 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss know more about the present

continuous and making

* Process:

- Ss work in pair to do task 2

- Feedback with reasons for their

choices.

- Ss work individually to do the task 3

(remind them to pay attention to the

“be” verb and to the spelling of verbs

ending in “e” such as take.

- Ss work in pair to do ask 4.

- feedback

- Ss work in pair to do task 5. First, ask

Ss to write the days Monday to

Sunday.

- Write activities next to each (three

activities listed in task 5).

- T models the conversation with the

class. Then ask Ss to mingle and make

arrangements with their classmates.

Feedback by asking Ss to tell the class

about their plans

* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can complete the

exercises

II. Practice

Task: write the sentences in the table.

* Actions now: They’re coming over.

* Plans for future: This evening, we are

working on our school project. I’m

going to judo club with my brother. I’m

visiting my grandma and grandpa.

Task 3: Write the sentences about Mi’s

plans for next week. Use the present

continuous for future.

1. Is taking

2. isn’t going

3. is visiting

4. is having

Task 4; Sort them out. Write N for Now

and F for Future.

1. N 2. F 3. N 4.F

5. F 6. N

Task 5 Game:

Would you like to come

to my party?

4. Practice and consolidation:

(5 minutes)

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do ex B5, B6, C1 page 18, 19 - workbook

- Prepare unit 3: Communication - page 29, 30 textbook

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 19

LESSON 4:

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need

- Knowledge: Use the vocabulary and structure about personality

Use the present continuous to talk about future plans and

arrangements.

Read for specific and general information in the texts.

- Skills: Speaking, writing

- Attitude: To teach Ss to be hard - working and love their friends.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: Does B6 - workbook page 18

- S2: writes new works

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

T. asks Ss too look at the picture and guess what the picture are about

-> The picture is about the animals, each animal is for a year (star sign)

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (5 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know how to read new

words, identify their meanings.

* Process:- Pre -teach vocabulary:

pictures/ translation/ examples.

- T: writes new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first

then whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 Ss to read the words again

- Checking: rub out and remember

* Conclusion: - Almost all the students

know new words and how to use them.

I. New words.

- Choir: Dàn hợp xướng

- curious: tò mò

- responsible: trách nhiệm

- reliable: tin cậy

- Active: nhanh nhẹn

- patient: kiên nhẫn

- caring: chu đáo

- description: sự miêu tả

Activity 2: Speaking (22 minutes)

* Aims:

To help ss to talk about their and their

friends’ personality.

* Process:

* Pre - speaking:T. shows the pictures

of the five friends in the magazine and

asks to discuss the friends with the

class: Where they are from. What their

names might be.

* While – speaking:- Ss look at the

picture then discuss.

- Ask Ss to find the star signs of the five

friends in 4 Teen

- Ask Ss to look at the adj of

personalities in the star signs and

compare them with what they read about

the five friends.

- Ss review the star sign descriptions for

their own signs (Ss can tick adjs they

agree with, and cross ones they

disagree).

* Post speaking:

- Play a line up game: Ss have to

arrange themselves in order of

birthdays.

+ Support them by reviewing months

and dates and giving a question and

answer they can use: When’s your

birthday? - It’s on...

- Ask Ss to read out their partner’s star

sign.

II. Speak:

Task 1: Read this page from 4 Teen

magazine

Task 2: Find the star sign of each

friend to find out about their

personality. Do you think the

description is correct?

Task 3: look at the star sign. Do you

agree with the description?

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks.

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson:

adjectives for personality

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises: C2, C3, D1 page 19 + 20 workbook

- Prepare unit 3: Skill 1 - page 32 textbook

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 20

LESSON 5

: SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: Read for specific and general information in texts including

advertisements and e-mails about the superb Summer Camp and a stay at the

Superb Summer Camp.

- Skills: Reading, Speaking

- Attitude: To teach Ss to be hard working and love their friends.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: Does C3 - workbook page 19

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

Show the class pictures of a backpack, hiking shoes, attent. Ask Ss to guess when

you might use all these things. Then ask Ss to open their books and check their

guesses.

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (7 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know how to read new words,

get their meanings.

* Process:- Teach vocabulary:

translation/ example/ pictures.

- T: Write new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first

then the whole class.

Checking: slap the board

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

know new words and how to use them

I. Vocabulary:

- Camp (n/v): trại, cắm trại

- Campfire (n): lửa trại

- Leadership: Người lãnh đạo

- field trip: chuyến thăm quan học tập

- attach: găn kết

- scary: sợ hãi

Activity 2: Reading (23 minutes)

* Aims:

To help Ss to get information about the

advertisement of the Superb Summer

Camp and Phuc’s e-mail and do some

exercises.

* Process:

* Pre -reading:

- T discusses with the Ss the features of

the advertisements: title, short texts, eye

-catching, contact details..

* While - reading:

- T asks Ss look at the advertisement for

2 minutes and try to remember as much

as they can. Elicit the answers by asking:

The camp is for children of what age?

What did you see in the pictures? Where

will the camp be?

When does it happen?

- Go through the contents of the

advertisement with the class the features

of e -mails: format, greetings, endings.

- Ask Ss to predict the boy’s feeling at

the camp.

- Ask Ss to quickly read and check their

predictions and find the answers to the

questions.

- Ask Ss to work in pair to read the text

II. Read

1. Read the advertisement and choose

the best answer.

1. b

2. c.

3. a

2. Read the text quickly, then answer

the questions

1. It’s an e-mail

2. It’s about a stay at the Superb

Summer Camp.

3. Yes, he is

3. Read the text again and write True

(T) of false (F).

1. F (he’s writing to his parents)

2. F (He has 3)

3. T

4. F (he hopes it isn’t too scary

5. F (They’re having a campfire and

telling stories)

6. F (they’re visiting a milk farm

7. F (They speak English only)

4. Make your own English camp

schedule

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

again and do True/ False exercise (task

3).

- T calls Ss t the board write the answer.

* Post - reading

- T. ask Ss to make their own English

camp schedule.

- Ss work in pairs and write a plan for the

weekend

- T. asks Ss to work in pairs tell the

partner about it

- Ss listen to their friend and fill in the

schedule.

- Practice to talk about friend’s schedule.

- T. calls some Ss to tell about their friend

schedule.

* Conclusion:Almost all the students can

get the information and do the tasks well

Morning

Afternoon

Day one

Visit

grandparents

Go fishing

Day two See movie

with friends

Stay home

Day

three

On Saturday morning, I am visiting

my grandparents, On...

5. Take turns. Tell the partner about it.

Morning

Afteroon

Day one

Visit

grandparents

Go fishing

Day two See movie

with friends

Stay home

Day

three

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: The information about The superb Summer

Camp and a stay the Superb Summer Camp.

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart

- Read Phuc’s e-mail again and translate it into Vietnamese

- Do exercise D2 + D3/P20 workbook

- Prepare unit 3: Skill 2 - page 33 textbook

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 21

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: Ss Will further practice with the present continuous tense for future

by completing listening tasks and then they will be able to improve their skill by

learning Study Skill R, D and C and then write an entry for a magazine using

notes.

- Skills: Listening: Listen for specific ideas

+ Writing: write an entry for a magazine using notes

- Attitude: To teach Ss to be hard - working and love their home and friends.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment:

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: Does D2 – Work book page 20

S2: writes new works.

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Matching: Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 30 - textbook to match with these

activities:

Hiking; Skiing; Visiting a milk farm; playing traditional games taking

part in a cooking competition; Playing beach volley ball taking a public speaking

class; Riding a bike; taking part in an art workshop

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (7 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know to read new works, get

their meanings.

* Process:

- Teach vocabulary: translation/

example/ pictures/ synonym .

- T: writes new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first

then the whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 Ss to read the words again

- Checking: Rub out and remember.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

know new words and how to use them.

I. New words

- Competition (n): Cuộc tranh tài

- workshop (n): phân xưởng

- traditional (adj): truyền thống

- public (n): công cộng

- (To) take part in = to join = to

participate in: tham gia

- beach volley ball (n): Bóng truyền bãi

biển

- unique dish (n): món ăn độc đáo

Activity 2: Listening (23 minutes)

* Aims: To help SS to listen to

the tape and complete the

listening tasks about the

activities at the Superb Summer

Camp.

* Process:

* Pre listening:

- Ss look at the photos on page

33 and choose the words in the

box to fill in the table.

* While listening.

- T plays the tape twice and Ss to

work individually to do the task

- Feedback

- Ss work in pairs and refer to the

content of the advertisement.

Talk about the activities that are

more likely to happen at the

camp and which are not. Then

explain why they think so.

II. Listening

Task 1:

What do you see in the photos?

Choose the words in the box to fill in the table.

Then listen and check

a

Hiking

b

Taking part in a cooking competition

c

Skiing

d

Visiting a milk farm

e

Taking part in an art workshop

f

Riding a bike

g

Taking a public speaking class

h

Playing beach volleyball

i

Playing traditional games

Task 2: Decide which activities are more

likely to happen at the camp and which are

not.

Activities that may happen at the Superb

Summer Camp: a, b, d, e, f, g, i

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Ss listen to the record (twice)

and fill in the table to do task 3.

- Feedback

* Post - listening:

- Ask SS to look at the table in

task 3 and retell the activities in

the trip.

* Conclusion: Almost all the

students can complete the

exercise.

Ba Vi mountains)

Task 3: Listen to Mr Lee talking on the phone

Morning

Afternoon

Day

2 Doing a

treasure hunt

Visiting a milk farm

and taking part in the

public speaking class

Day

Taking part

in the ‘Kids

Cook’

Contest

Activity 3: Writing (10 minutes)

* Aims:

To help SS to know to write an entry for

4Teen magazine.

* Process:

- Look at the Study Skills and read it

carefully.

- T explains some words to help SS to

understand the Study Skill.

- Ss work in groups and use the

suggestion to write for 4Teen magazine

about your plans this weekend with your

friends on A3 papers.

- Feedback

- Ask Ss to stick their writing on the

board and check

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can write the

entry for 4Teen magazine

II. Writing

* Study Skill

Task 4: Write for 4Teen magazine

about your plans this weekend with

your friends.

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: The present continuous tense for future;

write an entry for a magazine.

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn new words by heart

- Do exercise E1 + E2 page 20, 21 workbook

- Complete the writing: Write an entry for a magazine

- Prepare unit 3: Looking back + project - Page 34 + 35 textbook

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015

Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 3: MY friends

Period 22

LESSON 7:

LOOKING BACK + PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: Ss will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in

unit 3 then they can talk about of describe their friends; appearance, personality..

- Skills: + Speaking : describe their friends; talk about future plans.

+ Writing: Complete the dialogue

- Attitude: To teach Ss to be hard - working and love their home and friends.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

- S1: Does E1 - workbook page 20 + 21

- S2: writes new words.

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Brainstorming

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary (8 minutes)

*Aims: To help Ss to revise vocabulary.

* Process:- T divides class into two

groups.

- Ss work in groups and write the correct

words on the face.

- Students of groups go to the board and

put the words with the correct group.

- T gives the remarks

- T explains the Haiku is a traditional

form of Japanese poetry. There are 3

lines in a Haiku: the first and the last

lines have 5 syllables and the middle

line has 7 syllables. The lines rarely

rhyme.

I. Vocabulary

Task 1: Write the correct words on

the faces

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

- T reads the Haiku in the textbook. Ask

Ss to count the syllables in each line.

And then encourage Ss to create their

own Haiku

- SS work in group of 3 to exchange

their poems (without Ss names) and

guess the poem describes which person.

* Conclusion:Almost all the students

can complete the exercises

Activity 2: Grammar (10 minutes)

* Aims: To help SS to practice

grammar and vocabulary by

completing task 3&4

* Process:

Ask SS to work in group and choose a

member of group and write a short

description of him/her

- Demonstrate the activity with the

class

- Ss work in pairs to complete the

dialogue (Task 4)

- Ss work in pairs

- T. Calls Ss to write their answers on

the board

- T. Checks Ss answers

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can complete the tasks.

II. Grammar

Task 3. Game who’s who?

Group: Who is it?

A: He is tall. He has glasses. He is

talkative. He is creative too. He isn’t

shy

B: Is it Quang?

A: Yes

...

Task. Complete the dialogue

A: What are you doing tomorrow?

B: I’m meeting some friends. We are

going to mai’l birthday party. Would

you like to come?

A. Oh, sorry, I can’t. I’m playing

football.

B. No problem, how about Sunday?

I’m watching a film at the cinema

A. Sounds great!

Activity 3: Speaking (7 minutes)

* Aims: To help Ss to practice speaking

skill by completing the task 5.

* Process: Student A look at the

schedule on page 34, Student B look at

the schedule on page 35. T calls some

pairs practice be fore class.

- Correct and give marks.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can complete the tasks.

III. Communication

Task 5. Work in pair to ask and

answer about the schedules.

Ex:

A: What are you doing tomorrow?

B: I’m playing football with my

friends

Activity 4: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims: To help Ss to make a class

yearbook

* Process:

- Show the class some examples of

I. Project

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

yearbooks

- Explain what a yearbook is and why

SS like to make them.

- Discuss the appearances and the

descriptions of the examples.

- Duscuss how Ss can make their

yearbook pages look interesting (use

photos/coloured paper...)

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can know how to make a yearbook

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the present continuous tense for future

plans; vocabulary about personality, appearance...

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn again the present continuous tense for future plans and vocabulary about

personality, appearance...

- Do exercises E page 21 work book

- Prepare Review 1 page 36 + 37 - textbook

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 23

Review 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

- Knowledge:

- Revise all the learnt words and structures from unit 1 to unit 3. They can make

sentences using them

- Do some exercises in the form/ tense of the verbs pronunciation, vocab, grammar

from unit 1 to unit 3.

- Skills: Speaking: Pronounce the sounds they’ve learnt, use everyday English

fluently.

Writing: Use the simple present, present continuous, verbs: be/have...

correctly.

- Attitude: know the importance of revision and need to study harder

II. Preparations

- Materials: - A list of grammar and structures from unit to unit 3

- Some ex and their keys

- Equipment: Extra boards

III. Teaching process:

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Ask some questions

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Language (27’)

Aims: Ss review all pronunciation,

vocabulary, main grammar,

vocabulary and everyday English

they’ve learnt from Unit 1-3.

Process:

Pronunciation

- Ask sts exercise 1 and 3

individually

- T goes around the class to help

weak sts

- Get feedback

Vocabulady

- Aks sts to do exercise 3 in pairs

- Give feedback

- Then have sts write the words in

correct groups

Let sts do this ex by playing game

Get sts to work individually

Grammar

- Ask sts to repeat the two tenses

they have learnt: present simple and

present continuous

- Ask sts to write the form on the

board

- Have sts do exercise 6, 7

I. Language

1. Pronunciation

Ex 1: Odd one out

1. d 2.c 3.c 4.a 5.b

Ex 2: write the name of the school things

and furniture in the house which begin with

/b/ and /p/.

/b/: book, bag, bed...

/p/: pen, pencil, picture, poster....

2. Vocabulary

Ex3: Complete the words

1. English

2. Homework

3. Lunch

4. Sports

5. badminton

6. Phycis

7. lesson

8. Judo

Write the words in the correct group

Play: sports, badminton

Do: homework, judo

Have: lunch, physics, English, a lesson

Study: lesson, English, physics

Ex 4: Do the crossword puzzle

1. Wardrobe

2. dining room

3. living room

4. hall

5. apartment

6. poster

Ex 5: Choose the correct words

1. quiet

2. shy

3. hard - working

4. patient

5. sporty

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Ask Ss to read the text carefully and

pay attention to the hinst

- individually

* Conclusion:

- Ss can remember and understand

the use of these structures

2. do you have

3. am not going out/ am doing

4. likes/is

5. is

Ex 7: Complete the description with the

correct form of the verbs “be” and “have”

1. is 2. isn’t 3. Doesn’t have 4. Is

5. has 6. Are 7. Is 8. Is

Activity 2: Exercises (10’)

Aims: Help Ss to the exercises

Process:

T gives the exercises on the board and asks Ss to

do in their notebooks, and then give the answers

before class.

T and Ss correct the answers

Exercise 1: Insert the right verb forms

1. James and his brother (play)... soccer at the

moment?

2. look! A car (come)...

3. Lan and Nam (see)... a new film tonight

4. (Nam/work)...in the garden (eat)...

every day?

5. How much rice your children (eat)... every

day?

6. Every evening, my father

(watch)...television..

7. Linda (not write)... to David at this time.

8. where...Mai (be) now?

She (play)...in the garden

Exercise 2: odd one out

1. A. noodle B. food C. door

D. Stool

2. A. take B. game C. gray D. hand

3. A. buses B. goes C. boxes D. couches

4. A. Music B. lunch C.mum D. up

5. A. ear B. heavy C. head D. bread

Conclusion:

- Ss do these exercises well

II. Exercise

Keys

Exercise 1:

1. Are playing

2. Is coming

3. Are seeing

4. Is.... working

5. do...eat

6. isn’t writing

7. is Mai/is playing

Exercises 2:

1. B. food

2. D.hand

3. B. goes

4. A. musis

5. A. ear

4. Practice and consolidation:

(3 minutes)

- Correct the ex. If necessary

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Prepare Skills

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

====================================================
Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 24

written test 1

I. Objectives:

- Knowledge:

- To test Ss’ knowledge in the first two units to know how progressive the Ss are

and find out their strength and weakness of learning English so that teacher can

give them more suitable method of teaching.

- Skills: Do the test in writing, reading and listening

- Attitude: Teach Ss to be strict and honest

Competences:

- Being able to do the test well

II. Preparations

- Materials: Lesson plan, textbook

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up:

3. New leson:

MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 1

Chủ đề

Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Cộng

Thấp Cao

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ T

L KQTN TL

Listening 1.Listen and choose the correct picture according to what you hear
by circling A, B or C

2. Listen and circle the correct answer.

Số câu hỏi 10 10

Số điểm 2,5 2,5

(25%)
Vocabulary

+ Grammar preposition of place,number the present simple tense.

Số câu hỏi 4 6 10

Số điểm 1,0 1.5 2,5

(25%)
Reading 1.Read a passage (about 80 words) about personnal information then do T?F
2.Read a passage (about 80 words) about personnal information and her routine

then answer the questions.

Số câu hỏi 5 4 9

Số điểm 1,25 1,75 3,0

30%)

Writting 1.Write sentences using the words given

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

Số câu hỏi 4 4

Số điểm 2,0 2,0

(20%
)

Tổng số câu
Tổng số điểm
Tỉ lệ %

Số câu 19

Số điểm 4,75

47, 5%

Số câu 10

Số điểm 3,25

32,5%

Số câu 4

Số điểm 2,0

20 %

Số 
câu

33

Số 
điểm

10
100%
Câu 1 (1,5điểm).

Listen and choose the correct picture according to what you hear by circling A, B 
or C

1. A. B. C.
A. B. C.

3. A. B. C.

4. A. B. C.

5.A. B. C.

6. A. B. C.

Câu 2 (1,0điểm).. Listen and circle the correct answer.(Nghe và khoanh vào đáp án 
đúng 2đ)

1. What are those?

a. They’re a clock. b. They’re clocks. c. There are clocks.
2. What does he have?

a. He has a book. b. She has a book. c. She have a book.
3. What number is it?

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

a. six b. sixteen c. sixty
4. Choose a correct picture.

a. b. c.

Câu 3 (2,5điểm). Choose the best answer to complete the sentences by circling A, B,

C or D

1. - ... do you spell your name? – L- A- N

A. What B. Where C. When D. How

2. - ... do you live? – I live in Vietnam.

A. What B.Where C. When D. How

3. Which imperative talks about the picture correctly?
( Mệnh lệnh nào nói đúng về bức tranh?)

A. Sit down. B. Come in.
C. Close your book. D. Stand up.

4. Which word has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others?
( Từ nào có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác với những từ còn lại?)

A. books B. boards C. pens D. chairs

5. This is my mother. ... name is Nga.

A. His B. Her C. Your D. Their

6. Ba: Good morning, Lan
Lan: ... .

A. Fine, thanks B. Goodbye C. Good afternoon D. Good morning,
Ba

7. They ... students.

A. is B. am C. are D. be

8. forty + sixty = ...

A.one hundred B. ninety C. eighty

D. seventy

9. I live... Hai Duong city.

A. on B. in C. at D. with

10. Ba: How many people are there in your family?
 Lan: ...

A. There is one B. There are three.
C. There are four D. There are two

Câu 4 (1,25 điểm). Read the passage, then decide whether each statement below 
isTrue or false

My brother is Phong. He is twelve years old and he is a student at Nguyen Du
School. His school is on Nguyen Du Street in Hue City. There are thirty classes in
his school. That is his class with forty-five students. This is his classroom. In

his classroom, there is a board, a table, a chair and twenty-four desks. There is

a waste basket, too. He always keeps the classroom clean.

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

_______ 1. Phong is a teacher at Nguen Du School.
_______ 2. His school is in Hue City.

_______ 3. There are forty-five students in his class.
_______ 4. There is a board in his classroom.

_______ 5. He doesn′t keep the class clean.

Câu 5 (1,75 điểm). Read the pasage carefully and answer the questions:
NAM’S FAMILY

I am Nam. I am eleven years old. I live in a small house in the city with my father,
my mother, my sister. My father is forty – five years old. He is a doctor. My mother is
forty years old. She is a teacher. My sister is fifteen years old. She and I are students. I
love my family.

1. How many people are there in Nam’s family?

...
2. What does Nam’s father do?

...
3. What does Nam’s mother do?

...
4. Is Nam a student?

...

Câu 6 (1,0 điểm). Use the given words to make sentences

1 A: Where/ your teacher/ live?

... .
2. B:. She/ live/ big house/ Tran Phu Street.

... .

Câu 7 (1,0 điểm). Rewrite the sentences without changing the meaning.

1. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?

→ Are ... .

2. The bookstore is to the right of the toy store.

→ The toy store ...

4. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- T hands in the papers and gives remarks.

5. Intended test and evaluation: (1 minutes)

- Prepare the next lesson .

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 10/ 2015 6B: ……/10/ 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 4: My neighborhood

Period 25

LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: Listen to specific information about directions to some places in a

neighborhood

- Talk about different places and show directions to these in a neighborhood.

Skills:

+ Listening: Listen to the conversation among Phong, Khang, Nick and Girl and

understand what they are talking about.

+ Reading: Read the dialogue among them and put the action in the correct order.

+ Speaking: Make suggestions and give directions.

Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.

Competences: Reading and listening for specific information to locate places in

the neighourhood.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

- Ask SS to look at picture on page 26 (getting started) and answer some

questions:

How many people are there? What are they doing?

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to the conversation might be

about, identify their meanings and use them

to make sentences and know what they are

going to listen.

* Process:

- Write the unit title on the board”Lost in the

old town”

-Explain the meaning of the adjective “lost”

(= unable to find your way; not knowing

where you are) and the verb we use with it

are “be” and “get”.

-Ask Ss to guess what the picture might show

or what the conversation might be about. Let

Ss open their books and check their answers.

-Ask Ss questions about the picture

Getting started

1. Listen and read

Eg: Where are Nick, Khang and

Phong?

What might be happening to

them?

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

-Aks Ss to share any recent experiences of

being lost.

- Play the recording . Ss listen and read.

* Conclusion:

- Almost all the students understand the

conversation might be about and what they

are going to listen.

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)

* Aims:

- SS get the content of the

conversation among three people and

the complete the exercises.

* Process:

1- Listen and read

a-Ss work independently. Allow them

to share answers before discussing as

a class.

b- Tell Ss to refer back to the

conversation to find the phrases.

Practice saying them together

2- First, model the role-play with a

more able Ss. Then , ask pairs to

role-play the short conversations before

demonstrating for the class.

3. Have Ss quickly match each place

(in the picture) with its name. Then

play it again, pausing after each item

and asking them to repeat chorally

and individually. Correct their

pronunciation.

4. First, model this activity with a

more able student. Ask Ss to work in

pairs. Call some pairs to practise in

front of the class.

5- Have Ss quickly match each

instruction with the diagram. Check

their answers.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can

understand the conversation and

complete the exercises.

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

a, Read and put the actions in order.

Key: 2 5 3 4 1 6

b. Making suggestions. Put the words in

the correct order.

Key: 1.a. Where shall we go first?

b. Let’s go to “Chua Cau”

2. a. Shall we go there first?

b. Ok, sure

3. a. Shall we go by bicycle?

b. No, let’s walk there.

2. Work in pairs. Role-play making

suggestions.

Example:

A: What shall we do this afternoon?

B: Shall we play football?

A: Oh, sure

A: What shall we do this evening?

B: Shall we go to the cinema?

A: No, let’s go out and have an ice cream.

3. Match the places below with the

pictures. Then listen, check and repeat

the words.

Key: 1. E 2. H 3. F 4. C 5. G 6. A 7.

B 8.D

4. Think about where you live. Work in

pairs. Ask and anwser questions about it.

Example:

A: Is there a theater in your

neighbourhood?

B: Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t.

5. Match the instructions in the box with

the pictures.

Key:

1. Go straight on

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

4. Take the first turning on the left/ Take

the first left.

5. Go to the end of the road.

6. Go along the street.

7. Cross the street.

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and

writing skill by doing some exercises

* Process:

Game: Demonstrate the game to the

class first. Ask a more able Ss to

help . Then Ss play in pairs.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete

the tasks.

III. Further practice

6. Game: Work in pairs. Give your

partner directions to one of the places on

the map, and they try to guess. Then

swap.

Example:

A: Go straight. Take the second turning

on the left. It’s on your right.

B: Is that the art gallery?

A: Yes, it is/ No, try again.

4. Practice and consolidation:

(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Talk about different places and show

directions to these in a neighborhood

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Learn new works by heart

- Read the conversation again

- Do exercises + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese

- Prepare: Unit 4: A closer look 1

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 10/ 2015 6B: ……/10/ 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 4: My neighborhood

Period 26

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Objectives:

Knowledge: - Use adjectives to describe some places

- Pronounce correctly the sounds /i/ and /i:/ in isolation and in context.

Skills:

- Listening: Listen to the sounds /i/ and /i:/ and pronounce the two sounds

correctly

- Writing: Know the use of the adjective to describe the places.

Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love their neighborhood.

Competences: - Talking about and describing a neighbourhood.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: to go to the board to write new words

S2: does B3 in workbook (p17)

2.Warm - up:

(3 minutes) – Ss play games “Word Competition”

NEIGHBOURHOOD.

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (15 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings.

* Process:

- Teach new words: visual aids/

translation/ pictures

- T: writes new words on the board

- Checking: rub out and remember

- Ask Ss to match the words they know.

- Ask Ss to work in group. Point out

irregular plurals using the “watch out”

box.

1- Practise saying the adjectives.

- Ask Ss to write the correct adjective in

the blanks

- Play the recording to check answers.

2- Explain the contents in watch out

carefully to the Ss; Take some more

example to illustrate.

I. Vocabulary

1. New words

narrow: (adj) hẹp

historic: nổi tiếng hoặc quan trọng

trong lịch sử

fantastic: Kì quái, to lớn, dị thường

convenient: thuận tiện

boring: nhàm chán, tẻ nhạt

noisy: ồn ào, náo nhiệt

polluted: ô nhiễm

* Watch out!

2. Practice

1- Fill in ………

Key: 2. convenient 3. boring 4.

polluted 5. historic 6. narrow 7.

noisy

2- Match the …..

Key:

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

Ss do individually.

Check with the whole class

3- First, model this activity

Then practice in pair

Call some pair to practise in front of the

class.

* Conclusion: Students know new

words and complete the exercises.

noisy- quiet/ peaceful

convenient – inconvenient

fantastic- terrible

3- Work in pair.

Example:

A: Is our neighborhood polluted?

B: No, it isn’t

A: Is it peaceful?

B: Yes, it is

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation (10 minutes)

* Aims:

Hepl Ss to learn and practice the sounds

/i/ and /i:/.

* Process:

- Have the Ss practive the /i/ and /i:/

sounds together.

Ask Ss to identify which sound is longer

and which one is shorter.

Play the recording

Ss circle the words they hear

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know

pronounce the sounds: /i/ and /i:/ in

isolation and in context

II. Pronunciation: Sounds /i/ and /i:/

4- Listen and repeat the words. Pay

attention to the sounds /i/ /i:/

Key:

/i:/

/i/

cheap, sleep,

peaceful,

convenient,

police

historic,

exciting,

expensive,

noisy, friendly

5- Listen to the sentences and circle

the words

Key: 1. living 2. heat 3. seats 4. sheep

5. tins 6. mill 7. teams 8. Chip

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss to learn the verb have for

description.

* Process:

Ask Ss to listen while you play the

recording. Play the recording again and

ask Ss to chant along.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand

and use Have for description

*.Further- Practice

6- Listen and practise the chant.

Notice the sounds /i/ /i:/

4. Practice and consolidation:

(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson:

the sounds /b/ and/p/ in isolation and in

context; the vocabulary and structure about body parts, appearance, and

personality.

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do ex A1, A2, B1, B4, page 16, 17, 18 workbook

- Prepare unit 3: Closer look 2 -page 29, 30 textbook

Preparation day: / / 2015

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

UNIT 4: My neighborhood

Period 27

LESSON 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

- Knowledge: - Use the present continuous to talk about future plans and

arrangements.

- Make polite requests and suggestions and respond to them

- Skills: Speaking, writing

- Attitude: To teach SS to be polite and love their friends

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: goes to the board to write new words

2: does B1 page 17 in workbook

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Slap the board:

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings.

* Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/

synonym/ translation/ situation.

- SS: listen and repeat in individual

first then the whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 SS to read the words again

Checking: Rub out and remember

* Conclusion: Students know new

words and complete the exercises.

I. Vocabulary

Future plan (n): kế hoạch tương lai.

Finish (v) = end (v): kết thúc

Take a rest (v) = have a rest (v) = rest

(v): nghỉ ngơi

Museum (n): bảo tàng

Barbecue (n): món thịt nướng

Barbecue

Invite (v): Mời

Decide (v): quyết định

Activity 2: Presentation (10 minutes)

* Aims:

Help Ss to learn how to use the present

continuous tense to talk about future

plan and arrangements and identify and

practice the language of polite

II. Grammar

1. The present continuous tense

- To talk about future plan

Eg: I am not coming tonight. I am busy.

This evening, we are watching TV.

Hair

Tail

Round

Straight

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

requests.

* Process:

- Ask Ss to recall what happened in the

conversation in getting started (focus

on the verbs that were used)

- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and

follow the conversation on the page.

Play the tape again and ask SS to

underline all the verbs.

- Point out contextual clues, such as

adverbs of time:

this evening/

tomorrow.

- Point out that some verbs lose their

final “e” when - ing is added, eg:

coming/ writing/inviting/taking/ riding.

2. Making suggestions

S1: Would you like to go to my party on

Saturday?

S2: I’d love to

Oh, I am sorry, I can’t

Activity 3: Practice (15 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss know more about the present

continuous and making

* Process:

- Ss work in pair to do task 2

- Feedback with reasons for their

choices.

- Write activities next to each (three

activities listed in task 5).

- T models the conversation with the

class. Then ask Ss to mingle and make

arrangements with their classmates.

Feedback by asking Ss to tell the class

about their plans

* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can complete the

exercises

II. Practice

Task: write the sentences in the table.

* Actions now: They’re coming over.

* Plans for future: This evening, we are

working on our school project. I’m

going to judo club with my brother. I’m

visiting my grandma and grandpa.

Task 3: Write the sentences about Mi’s

plans for next week. Use the present

continuous for future.

1. Is taking

2. isn’t going

3. is visiting

4. is having

Task 4;

1. N 2. F 3. N 4.F 5. F6. N

Task 5 Game:

Would you like to come

to my party?

4. Practice and consolidation:

(5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson:

The present continuous to talk about

future plans and arrangements, suggestion

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Prepare unit 4: Communication Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015

Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

Period 28:

TEST CORRECTION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: Know the mistakes they’ve made in the test and correct their

mistakes

- Skills: reading, writing

- Attitude: Realize their mistakes and need to learn more carefully

II. Preparations

- Materials: Lesson plan, test paper

- Equipment: stereo, tape English 9

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up:

(5 minutes)

Play bingo (kinds of clothing)

3. New lesson: (

35 minutes

)

Teacher’s and students’ activities

Main contents

Activity 1: Correcst the test (35 minutes)

Aims: Students know their mistakes,

how to correct them.

* Process:

T presents the mistakes that Ss in the

test

Ss listen and correct themselves

T calls two Ss do the exercise on the

board and asks the rest to do the

exercise on their papers

T shows some common mistakes

Number one :

David: What is this?
Mary: It is an ruler.
Number two:

David: What is that?
Mary: It is a board.
 Number three: 
David: What is this?
Mary: It is an armchair
Number four:

David: What are these?
Mary: They are books
 Number five :

David: What are those?

Mary : They are televisions 
Number six:

David: What are these?
Mary: They arelamps

Câu 1 (1,5điểm)..

Listen and choose the correct picture 
according to what you hear by circling A,
B, or C

Mỗi số đúng được 0,25 điểm
Answer Key:

1. A 2. C 3. B

4. A 5. C 6. B

Câu 2 (1,0điểm).Listenand write the 
prepositions you hear.

Mỗi số đúng được 0,25 điểm

1. What are those?

b. They’re clocks.
2. What does he have?
a. He has a book.
3. What number is it?
c. sixty

4. Choose a correct picture.
a

Câu 3 (2,5điểm).Select the best options: 
( 0,25 x 10 = 2,5 points)

1. D 2. B 3. D 4. A

5. B 6. D 7. C 8. A

9. B 10. C

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

* Conclusion:

All students ralize their mistakes and

can correct them

0,25 điểm

T/F Statements

___F___ 1. Phong is a teacher at

Nguen Du School.
__T____ 2. His school is in Hue

City.

__T____ 3. There are forty-five
students in his class.
__T____ 4. There is a board in his

classroom.

___F___ 5. He doesn′t keep the
class clean.

Câu 5 (1,75điểm).Read the passage 
carefully then answer the questions below
1. There are four.(0,5điểm).

2. He is a dotor..(0,25điểm).

3. She is a teacher..(0,5điểm).

4. Yes, he is..(0,5điểm).

Câu 6 (1,0điểm).Use the given words to 
make sentences Dựa vào từ gợi ý viết 
thành câu hoàn chỉnh)

1 A: Where does your teacher live?

B:. She lives in a big house on Tran Phu
Street.

Câu 7 (1,0 điểm). Rewrite the sentence 
1. Are there forty classrooms in Phong’s
school?

2. The toy store is to the left of the
bookstore

4. Practice and consolidation (3 minutes)

- Teacher remind Ss to study harder, more carefully

5. Subsequent activites (2 minutes)

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

UNIT 4: MY neighbourhood

Period 29

LESSON 4:

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need

- Knowledge: - Listen for specific information about directions to some places in

a neighbourhood

- Create an audio guide for your city.

Skills: + Listening: Listen to an audio guide to Hoi An and complete the missing

words.

+ Writing: Create an audio guide for your city.

+ Speaking: Give direction to different places.

Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love their neighborhood

Competences: - Giving directions

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

- Retell comparison

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

T. asks Ss play games “Brainstorming”

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (5 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know how to read new

words, identify their meanings.

* Process:- Pre -teach vocabulary:

pictures/ translation/ examples.

- T: writes new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first

then whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 Ss to read the words again

- Checking: rub out and remember

* Conclusion: - Almost all the students

know new words and how to use them.

I. New words.

First: đầu tiên

then: sau đó

After that: (tiếp) sau đó

Finally: cuối cùng

Activity 2: Speaking (22 minutes)

* Aims: Ss can use the structures to an

create an audio guide for their city

* Process:

II. Practice

1. Nick is listening to an audio guide

to Hoi An. Listen and fill in the gaps.

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

* Pre - speaking: Today we are going

to listen to an audio guide to Hoi An.

What do you know about Hoi An?

Anything you can remember about it?

* While – speaking:

- Ex:1- Play the cording.

Listen . Listen again then fill in the gaps

as they listen.

Ask Ss to share their answer in pairs.

- Read the audio guide again , pay

attention to the use of the connective

words: Firstly, secondly, thirdly…

Ex2: Ask Ss to read the brief

information about London and Ho Chi

Minh City and look carefully at the two

simplified maps of the two cities

- Have Ss prepare their audio guide

individually then share it with a partner.

- Have Ss practise presenting their audio

guide in pairs.

* Post speaking:

Ex: 3: Call some Ss to present their

audio guide to the whole class.Ask other

Ss to give their comments.

Teacher gives comments correct the

mistakes.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks.

Key:

1. historic 2. convenient 3. straight

4. Second 5. left 6. right 7. second

8. next to.

2. Choose one of the cities below.

Create an audio guide for your city.

Eg: - Ho Chi Minh City : largest city

in south Viet nam; historic city; busy

street with a lot of motorbikes; many

beautiful places and restaurants.

Welcome to Ho Chi Minh City! It is

the largest city in south Viet Nam….

- London: capital City of England; on

the river Thames; historic city; old

buildings and beautiful parks.

3. Present your guide to your class.

Eg: Ho Chi Minh City is the largest

City in south Viet Nam….

OK. Let’s start our tour! First, go to

Duc Ba Cathedral . To get there, walk

along Ly Tu Trong Street, take the

first left then go straight ….

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson:

directions to different places.

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises: C1, C2 page 29 + 30 workbook

- Prepare unit 4: Skill 1

Preparation day: / / 2015

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

UNIT 4: MY neighbourhood

Period 30

LESSON 5

: SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: - Get information from Khang’s blog and answer the questions.

- Practice asking and answering about directions.

Skills: + Reading: reading Khang’s blog about his neighbourhood

+ Speaking: Ask and answer questions about how to get to the places on the map.

Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love their neighborhood

Competences: - Asking for and giving directions; Reading a description of a

neighbourhood.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: Does C2 - workbook page 29 Places weather

S2: Does C3 - workbook page 30

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Houses

people food

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (7 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know how to read new words,

get their meanings.

* Process:- Teach vocabulary:

translation/ example/ pictures.

- T: Write new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first

then the whole class.

Checking: slap the board

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

know new words and how to use them

I. Vocabulary:

suburb(n): ngoại ô

backyard(n): sân sau, vườn sau

dislike >< like

incredible:(adj) không thể tin được

Activity 2: Reading (23 minutes)

* Aims:

To help Ss to get information about good

things and bad things in a neighbourhood

* Process:

* Pre -reading: Look at the picture of

II. Read

1. Find these words in Khang’s

blog. What do they mean?

2. Read Khang’s blog. Then answer

the question.

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Khang’s neighborhood.

Where do you think Khang’s

neighborhood is?

Do you like living there? Why? why not?

* While – reading:

Ex1: Ask Ss to scan the passage to find

where the words suburbs, backyard,

dislike, incredibly, beaches are in the

passage.

Ex 2: Read the text again and answer the

questions.

Compare their answers.

Ex 3: Ask Ss to scan the passage again

and find the information to complete the

table. Ask Ss to note where they found

the information.

Compare the answers before discussing

them as class work.

*Post -reading

Speaking : T reminds the way to give the

directions

Ex4,5: Ss work in pairs, asking and

answering questions in the dialogue.

T circulates and monitors.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can get the information and do the tasks

well

1. It is in the suburbs of Da Nang

City.

2. Because it has beautiful parks and

sandy beaches and fine weather.

3. They are very friendly.

4. Because there’re many modern

buildings

and offices in the city.

3. Read …...

Key:

Like

Dislike

- It’s great for

outdoor activities

- There’s almost

everything here.

-Most houses have a

backyard and a front

yard.

- People are

incredibly friendly.

- The food is very

good.

- The streets

are busy,

crowded, and

noisy during

the day.

4. Look at the map of Khang’s

neighborhood…..

Example:

A: Excuse me. Can you tell me the

way to the beach?

B: Yes. First , go straight. Then turn

right. After that go straight again. It’s

in front of you.

A: Thank you very much.

5. Work in pairs. Ask and answer

questions about the way to get to the

places in your town/ in your village/

near your school.

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Read Khang’s blog

- Do exercise in workbook. Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015

- Prepare : Skill 2 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

.

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

UNIT 4: MY neighbourhood

Period 31

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

* Knowledge: - Write a paragraph about neighbourhood saying what they like or

dislike about living there

- Complete listening and writing tasks.

* Skills: + Listening: Complete the missing word, choose the correct places.

+ Writing: Write a paragraph about

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard

* Competences: Listening for specific information to locate places in a

neihbourhood.; writing a paragraph describing your neighbourhood.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

S1: Does exercises in work book

S2: writes new works.

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Chatting : Study skills- Listening

Read the questions carefully.

- Decide what information you are listening for

- think of some words that you might hear.

- listen for important information only.

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (7 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know to read new works, get

their meanings.

* Process:

- Teach vocabulary: translation/ example/

pictures/ synonym .

- T: writes new words on the board.

- Checking: Rub out and remember.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students know

new words and how to use them.

1. Review

suburb: vùng ngoại ô

backyard: sân sau

dislike: không thích

incredible: không thể tin được, lạ

thường

beach: bãi biển

Activity 2: Listening (23 minutes)

* Aims: To help SS to listen to the tape

and complete the listening tasks about

giving directions

* Process:

Pre-listening:Review some new words.

While- listening

Ask Ss to read the first part of the

conversation carefully and guess what

II. Listening

1- Listen to the conversation between

a strnger and Duy’s dad..

1. the end 2, right 3. lower secondary

school 4. Le Duan Street 5. second

right.

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

words or phrases can be filled in the

blanks. Eg: for the first blank they can

easily guess the phrases the end because

they have already learnt the expreesion

Go to the end of the street.

Post- listening

Play the recording again for Ss to check

their answer. T comments

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can complete the exercise.

below…

1. A 2. C 3. F 4. D

Activity 3: Writing (10 minutes)

* Aims:

To help SS to know to write a paragraph

about what they like or dislike about their

neighbourhood

* Process:

* Pre- writing

Ss think about what they like or dislike about

their neighbourhood.

- Ask them to tick then share their answer

with their partners.

- Ask Ss to make notes on what they like or

dislike about living in their neighbourhood.

* While- writing

Set up the writing activity.

Remind Ss to write the first draft.

Then have them write their final version.

* Post- writing

T may display all or some of the leaflets on

the wall

Other Ss and T give comments.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can write write a

paragraph

II. Writing

Write a paragraph about your

neighbourhood saying what you

like or dislike about living there.

I’d like to tell you some good

things and some bad things about

living in my neighbourhood

.

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Write a paragraph about neighbourhood

saying what they like or dislike about living there

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn new words by heart

- Do exercise E1 + E2 in workbook

- Prepare unit 4: Looking back + project

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: - Review the comparative adjectives and giving directions by

doing exercises.

*Skills: + Speaking: Role-play the questions and answer.

+ Writing: Write a description of neighbourhood.

*Attitude: To teach SS to love their neighborhood

*Competences:- Comparing things and people.

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

- S1: Does exercise in workbook

- S2: writes new words.

2. Warm - up:

(3 minute)

Net work

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary (8 minutes)

*Aims: To help Ss to revise vocabulary.

* Process:- T divides class into two

groups.

- Ss work in groups and write the correct

words on the face.

- Students of groups go to the board and

put the words with the correct group.

- T gives the remarks

- Tell Ss to write the words in their

notebooks individually and then check

with their partner

* Conclusion:Almost all the students

can complete the exercises

* Vocabulary

1- Write the correct word for each

picture.

1. statue 2. railway station 3. park

4. temple 5. memorial 6. cathedral

2- Fill each gap with a suitable

adjective

1. noisy 2. narrow 3. historic

4. inconvenient

5. cheaper/ more expensive

Activity 2: Grammar (10 minutes)

* Aims: To help SS to practice

grammar and vocabulary by

completing task 3&4

* Process:

Ask Ss to do individual first.

Ss check their answers with a

partner.

Discuss the answers as a class.

* Conclusion: Almost all the

II. Grammar

3- Put the following adjectives in the

correct column.

1 syllable

2 syllable

3 syllable

fast

hot

large

happy

noisy

quiet

heavy

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

students can complete the tasks.

table.

Adjectives

Comparative form

fast

convenient

noisy

difficult

heavy

expensive

happy

hot

polluted

exciting

large

quiet

faster

more convenient

noisier

more difficult

heavier

more expensive

happier

hotter

more polluted

more exciting

larger

quieter

Activity 3: Speaking (7 minutes)

*Aims: To help Ss to practice the task5.

* Process: Ss read the questions and

answers once or twice. Then match

them.

Write all sentences in their notebooks.

- Ss work in pairs and role-play the

questions and answers.

- Ask Ss to complete the

self-assessment. Identify any difficulties and

weak areas and provide further practice.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can complete the tasks.

III. Communication

5- Complete the sentences

comparing the pictures. Use

comparative form of the adjectives

below.

1. noisier 2. more modern than

3. more convenient than

4. more beautiful than

5. more expensive than

6- Match the questions with the

correct answers.

a-c d-e f-g h-b

7- Role-play the questions and

answers.

Activity 4: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims: To help Ss write a paragraph

about their neighbourhood

* Process:

Ask Ss t look at the pictures of two

neighbourhoods in the student’s book

and point out the typical features of

them.

Work in group to discuss their ideas

Write a paragraph about their ideas.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students

can know how to write a paragraph

about their neighbourhood

I. Project

1. Find a photo or draw a picture of

your ideal neighbourhood.

2. Write a description of it. Use these

cues:

Where is it?

What it has?

How the people/ the streets/

weather….is/are

Other….

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn again the present continuous tense for future plans and vocabulary about

personality, appearance...

- Do exercises in work book

- Prepare unit 5: Getting started

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: ……/ 11 / 2015

Period 33

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: - Extend and practise vocabulary related to natural wonders of the world.
- Listen to specific information about some natural wonders of the world.
*Skills: + Speaking:

+ Listening: Listen and get the main information.
+ Writing: Write the words in the correct order.
+ Reading: Read the conversations+ do the task

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard , love and proud of natural wonders of the world.
*Competences: - Describing natural wonders in the world.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: 
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

- Ask SS to look at picture on page 46 (getting started) and answer some
questions: - What can you see in this picture?

- Where is it?

- Do you know this place?

- Have you ever been there before?
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify their
meanings and use them to make sentences and

know what they are going to listen.

* Process:

Ask Ss to describe what they can see. Ask Ss if
they know the places

What can you see in the picture?
Where is it?

Do you know this place?

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/ real
object/ translation/ situation

Checking
* Conclusion:

- Almost all the students understand the new
words might be used and what they are going to
listen.

Getting started
mountain (n) :
waterfall (n):
forest (n):
desert (n) :
island (n) :
valley (n):

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)
* Aims:

- SS get the content of the conversation
among five people and the complete the
exercises.

* Process:

a- Ss work independently. Allow them to
share answers before discussing in groups

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

a- Answer the following questions:
1. Vy is

2. She went to the wrong room.
3. Uluru

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

or as a class.

b- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation
to find the phrases. Ss can work together
to write the correct sentences. Ensure they
add appropriate punctuation

-Practice saying the letters together.

-Draw a character on the board.
c- Use the example to practice a
conversation with Ss. Then ask Ss to
develop a role-play around their ideas.
Support with suggestions. More able Ss
can try to extend the conversation.
* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand the
conversation and complete the exercises.

5. An island

b- Put the words in the correct order.
1. Can you spell that, please?

2. Can you repeat that, please?
3. Can I come in ?

- Role - play

2- Listen and repeat

1. mountain

2. river
3. waterfall
4. forest
5. cave

6. desert
7. lake
8. beach
9. island
10. valley
3- Label the pictures

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and writing
skill by doing some exercises

* Process:

- Ss listen and repeat.

- Ss look back at the conversation in
Getting Started and try to find the
vocabulary used.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
tasks.

III. Further practice

4- Read the conversation in 1 again. Tick

the words you can find.

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Talk about specific information about some
natural wonders of the world.

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn new works by heart

- Read the conversation again

- Do exercises + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese
- Prepare: Unit 5: A closer look 1

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015 
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: ……/ 11 / 2015

Period 34

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: -Pronounce correctly the sound /t/ and / st/ in isolation and in context.

- Use lexical items related to “thing in natural” and “travel item”.

Skills: + Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /t/
and /st/ they hear.

+ Writing: Complete the missing words, using the travel items.
Attitude: To teach SS to love travelling.

Competences: - Knowing the travel items.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: to go to the board to write new words
S2: does exercises in workbook

2.Warm - up: (3 minutes) – Ss play games “Brainstorming”
DESERT BEACH MOUNTAIN.

- Asks Ss to brainstorm all the adj to describe those places and things you need to bring
when travelling there:

DESERT we have: dry, hot, sandy, water, compass, tent……

BEACH we have: windy, sandy, cool, fresh, sunny, swimming……

MOUNTAIN we have: windy, pure, cool, sandy, fresh, shoes, sun cream…..
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (15 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify
their meanings.

* Process:

- Teach new words: visual aids/ translation/
pictures

- T: writes new words on the board
- Checking: rub out and remember
- Ask Ss to match the words they know.
- Ask Ss to work in group. Point out

irregular plurals using the “watch out” box.
Ex2- Read and act out the sentences for Ss.
Elicit ideas for sentence 1. The allow Ss to
complete the remaining sentences. Check
their ideas at the end.

Ex3- Allow to work together to form their
list.

* Conclusion: Students know new words
and complete the exercises.

I. Vocabulary
plaster:

walking boots:
painkillers:
sun scream:
scissors:
sleeping bag:
backpack:
compass:

2. Complete the following sentences
1. compass

2. sun scream
3. painkillers
4. backpack
5. plaster

3. Put the items in order.

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation (10 minutes)
* Aims: Hepl Ss to learn and practice the

sounds /t/ and /st/.

* Process:Practice /t/ and /st/ together.

Ask Ss to emphasize that /t/ is a long

II. Pronunciation: Sounds /t/ and /st/
4. Practice sounds /t/ and /st/

Key:

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

sound,/st/ is a long sound with a “stop”
* Conclusion: Almost all the students can
know pronounce the sounds: /t/ and /st/ in
isolation and in context

plaster forest.

5.Listen again and repeat the words
Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims: Hepl Ss to learn and practice the
sounds /t/ and /st/.

* Process:Play the recording of the
sentences. Ask Ss to listen carefully and
raise their hands when they hear the /t/
and /st/

Play the recording again . Pause after each
sentence and ask to repeat.

* Conclusion:Almost all the students can
know pronounce the sounds: /t/ and /st/ in

isolation and in context

III.Further- Practice

6- Listen and practise the chant. Notice 
the sounds /i/ /i:/

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds /t/ and/st/ in isolation and in context
and vocabulary

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare unit 5: Closer look 2

Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: …/11/ 2015

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

Period 35

LESSON 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2

I. Objectives:

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

*Knowledge: - Know about the comparatives and superlatives adjectives with short
adjectives to describe things in nature.

- Use must or mustn’t to give orders.
*Skills: Read and guest the statements T or F

+ Listening: Listen to the recording to check the answers.

+ Writing: Use the comparatives and superlatives adjectives to compare things.
+ Reading: Complete a passage

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.
*Competences:- Indentifying natural wonders in the country.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: goes to the board to write new words
S2: does B1 in workbook

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) Guessing games: T uses those pictures in this lesson to
review the new words and asks Ss to guess their names.

3- New lesson: (35 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching structure ( 12 minutes)
* Aims:

Help Ss to learn how to use the
comparatives and superlatives
adjectives with short adjectives to
describe things in nature requests.
* Process:

Comparative and superlative
* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can use the
comparatives and superlatives
adjectives and do exercises
fluently.

II. Grammar. The superlative adjectives
Short adj:S + V + the + adj + est + N/pronoun
Long adj:S + V + the most + adj + N/pronoun.
Ex:

She is the tallest girl in the village.
He is the most gellant boy in class.
Dạng khác:S + V + the least + adj +
N/pronoun(ít nhất)

Chú ý:

-1.Những tính từ ngắn kết thúc bằng một phụ
âm mà ngay trước nó là ngun âm duy nhất
thì chúng ta nhân đơi phụ âm lên rồi thêm "er"
trong so sánh hơn và "est" trong so sánh nhất.

(ex:hot-->hotter/hottest) : Ví dụ: hot –>
hotter;fat –> fatter;thin –> thinner;fit –> fitter
2.Những tính từ có hai vần,kết thúc bằng chữ
"y" thì đổi "y" thành "i" rồi thêm "er" trong so
sánh hơn và "est" trong so sánh

nhất(ex:happy-->happier/happiest)

3.Những tính từ/trạng từ đọc từ hai âm trở lên
gọi là tính từ dài,một âm gọi là tính từ

ngắn.Tuy nhiên,một số tính từ có hai vần
nhưng kết thúc bằng "le","et","ow","er"vẫn
xem là tính từ ngắn : quiet –> quieter ;clever –
> cleverer;simple –> simpler;narrow –>

narrower

4. Các tính từ so sánh bất quy tắc thì học 
thuộc lịng

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

bad/worse/the worst

many(much)/more/the most
little/less/the least

far/farther(further)/the farthest(the furthest
Activity 2: Practice ( 18 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss know more the
comparatives and superlatives
adjectives with short adjectives to
describe things in nature

* Process: - Asks Ss to do exercises
Ex 6: Prepare the slips of paper
beforehand for the groups.

Work in groups and make sentences
about the places.

Modal verb must

Recall the conversation from getting
started: “ Who is the leader of the
Geography Club? Why was Mai
late? Are you sometimes late for
class? Hoe does your teacher feel?
What does your teacher say?
Ex7: Ask Ss to read Vy’s note and
find the uses of must

* Conclusion: Almost all Ss can
complete the exercises

II. Practice

Comparative and superlative

Ex1:

1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. T 6. T
Ex 2: Check Ss’ answers.
Ex3: - underline – est
Ex 4:

good better Best

bad worse Worst

tall taller Tallest

long longer Longest

wide wider Widest

large larger Largest

hot hotter Hottest

Ex 5:
1.

hottest 2. hotter 3. coldest 4. coldest
5. colder 6.

biggest 7. highest 8. smaller
Ex7:

Must- is an order.
Activity 4: Production (5minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss know how to use must or mustn’t to
give orders

*Process: Ask Ss to complete the sentences.
Ss can share their ideas in pairs. Discuss
answers as a class

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students can
do the exercises.

III. Further practice
Ex 8:

- Eg: 1. We must arrive on time

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: comparatives and superlatives adjectives with
short adjectives to describe things in nature. Use must or mustn’t to give orders.
5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Prepare unit 4: Communication
Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: …/11/ 2015

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

Period 36

LESSON 4 :

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

- Can be a tour guide and a tourist to prepare for the trip

*Skills: + Speaking: Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist to prepare for a trip to
the Himalayas.

+ Reading: get the information from the travel guide entry
Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.
*Competences: - Reading short passage to get travel tips.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
- Retell super comparison

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

T. asks Ss play games “Chatting”: What you should take if you go on a trip in the

countryside?

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings and use them to make
sentences.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/
example.

- T: writes new words on the board.

- SS: listen and repeat in individual first then
the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students know
new words and how to use them.

I. Vocabulary
tent (n) : lều

torch (n): đuốc, đèn pin
sun hat (n): mũ chống nắng

waterproof coat (n): áo chống thấm
nước

map (n) : bản đồ

mobile phone (n): điện thoại di động

Activity 2: Speaking ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to know how to make friends and
what questions are suitable to ask a new friend
at school.

* Process:

* Pre - speaking: Show Ss a travel guide. Ask
them what information it contains. Discuss the
contents. Then ask who uses travel guides and
why people use them.

* While – speaking:

Ex1-Ask Ss to look at the photo of Mount
Everest. Show pictures of the extra vocabulary.
Ask Ss to decide whether the objects are useful

for going to Mount Everest

Ask Ss to read the text again and ask some
following- up questions.

What do you think diverse means?

Have you had any unforgettable experiences?

II. Speak

1.Read the travel guide entry
Eg: Must we take a torch to Mount
Everest?

Eg: What is a mountain range?

2. Make a list of the things you

must take to the Himalayas. Then

add things you mustn’t take.

Must Mustn’t

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

* Post speaking:

Ex 2: Ask Ss to use information in the text and
their own ideas to fill in the “must” and

“mustn’t” columns.

Teacher gives comments correct the mistakes.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks

Activity 3: Further practice ( 8 minutes)
*Aims:

T calls on some Ss to be a tourist guide and
a tourist.

*Process:

Create your own list and demonstrate the
activity with a more able Ss. Swap roles.
Then ask the class to complete the role-play.
Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.
*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice
speaking skill.

III. Further practice

3. Role-play being a tour guide and a 
tourist.

Eg: A : I want to go to the Himalayas
B: Ok. I think you must take a
waterproof coat. It’s the highest
mountain in the world. It’s cold and

rainy there!

A: Yes. Anything else?
B: ....

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Ss can be a tour guide and a tourist to prepare
for the trip

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises: C1, C2 in workbook
- Prepare unit 5: Skill 1

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015 
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: …/11/ 2015

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

Period 37

LESSON 5 :

SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: - Know more about wonders in Viet Nam and can tell your partner about
these places.

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

+ Reading: Read the text and complete the reading tasks.
Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.

Competences: - Reading short passage for a tourist information
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: Does C3 - workbook S2: writes new words

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) Ask Ss to compare the text in Communication and Skill 1. 
Encourage Ss to think of the purpose of the texts and where they might see them. (Point
out Travel Tips in the first text. Point out exclamation marks and positive adjectives in
the second text.

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (7 minutes)

* Aims: Ss know how to read new words,

get their meanings.

* Process:- Teach vocabulary: translation/
example/ pictures.

- T: Write new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then
the whole class.

Checking: slap the board

* Conclusion: Almost all the students know
new words and how to use them

I. Vocabulary:

- activities (n) : các hoạt động
- cuisine (n): ẩm thực

- essential (adj) :cần thiết
- attraction (n) : điểm hấp dẫn

Activity 2: Reading (23 minutes)
* Aims:

To help Ss to know more about wonders in
Viet Nam and can tell your partner about

these places and do some exercises.
* Process:

* Pre -reading:

Ask Ss to read the text quickly to answer the
questions and check their ideas from the
introduction. Allow pairs to discuss ideas
before feeding back as a class

* Study skill:

Discuss the Study Skill with Ss.

Ex2- Ask Ss to find the four words in the
passages and underline them, then check
their meaning.

*While- Reading

Ex3- Ask Ss to find the four words in the
passages and underlined them, then check
their meaning.

Ex4- Read the sentences together with Ss.
Set a longer time limit for them to reread the
text and answer T or F

II. Read

Ex3: Read the following sentences. Then
tick (V) true (T) or false (F)

Key

1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T

Ex4: Now anwer the following questions
Key: 1. Ha Long Bay is in Quang Ninh
Province.

2. You must take a boat ride

3. A visit to the Imperial City is more
important.

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

again then answer the questions

Ex5- Discuss with which things they find
interesting/ uninteresting about Halong Bay
and Hue. Brainstorm ideas onto the board.
*Post – reading

Ex6- Ask Ss to close their books. Divide Ss
into A group and B group. Tell A group to
describe Ha Long Bay. Tell B group to
describe Hue. Ss use the notes only to help
them tell their partner about their place.
Ex7- Show a picture of your town. Tell the
class they are visiting it. Review interesting

features of your town with Ss. Then ask Ss
to suggest some advice. Encourage them to
use must/ mustn’t.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students can
get the information and do the tasks well
4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: The information about know more about
wonders in Viet Nam and can tell your partner about these places

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- How well do you know about Viet Nam
- Prepare unit 5: Skill 2

Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: …/11/ 2015

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

Period 38

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: - Listen to a travel agent and write a travel guide.
- Write a travel guide entry about an interesting place.
Skills:

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

+ Writing: Write a short paragraph about a place you know.
Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.

Competences: - Listening to get information about amazing places or a travel guide;
writing a travel guide about natural attraction.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute)

S1: Does exercise B4 page 34 in work book S2: writes new works.
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

Chatting: Which place would you like to visit? Why?
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: SS Listen to a travel agent and write a

travel guide.
*Process: 
* Pre listening:

Ask Ss to recall the two places in brochure in
Skills 1( Ha Long Bay and Hue). Ask Ss which one
they think Nick’s family will choose as their
holiday destination. You can put pictures of Hue
and Halong Bay on opposite walls. Ask Ss to stand
next to the place they choose. Ask Ss to explain
their choice. Play the recording for the answer.
* While –listening

- Read through the questions with students and
support with any difficulties before they attempt to
answer. Play the recording again. Ss share their
answers. Play again and allow Ss to check their
answers. Encourage Ss to identify the parts of the
recording that helped them.

* Post- listening:

- Ask SS to retell the information about Susie.
*Conclusion: Almost all the students can complete
the exercise.

I. Listening

1. Nick’s family rae in the 
travel agent’s…..

Ex1:They choose Halong Bay
2. Listen again and answer the 
following questions.

1. Ha Long Bay, Hue , Mui Ne
or Nha Trang.

2. Can we see a picture of the
hotel in Mui Ne?

3. Mui Ne is cheaper but I think
Ha Long Bay is more interesting.
4. Yes, he is

Activity 2: Writing ( 10 minutes)
*Aims: To help SS to write a travel guide

entry about an interesting place
 * Process:

*Pre writing: Ask Ss to bring in pictures of
places they have been to or find interesting.
Alternatively they can draw pictures or map.
Remind Ss of the steps of the following
process-research, draft, check.

*While writing: Ss present their chosen places
using photos/ drawing/maps. Choose Ss to
show their places to the class. Ask some
questions to prepare the class for the activities

II. Writing

3. Write a travel guide about a 
place you know.

- Do you have picture or you can
draw a map of the place?

- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other
natural wonders?

- What things can you do there?
What tings must you do?

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

*Post writing: Ask Ss to make notes about
their chosen places. Remind them they do not
have to write full sentences. Then, ask Ss to
share their notes with their partners. T may
read out the notes from some more able Ss to
whole class.

Ss can use the Travel Guide in Communication
as their model. Suggest they write a description
first, then travel tips next.

Ss and T give comment.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can write a travel guide
entry about an interesting place

about…..

Activity 3: Production ( 13 minutes)
*Aims:

- Ss can write a short paragraph about a place
you know

*Process:

Ss can exchange and read each other’s drafts.
Encourage Ss to check punctuation and their
use of superlative. Ss can underline parts that
could be improved and focus on those areas as
they write their final version. If time is limited,
T may ask Ss to write the final version at home
Display all or some of the Travel Guide
entries on the wall. Other

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students can do
the exercises.

Draft.
Check.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Write a short paragraph about a place you know
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Do exercise E1 + E2,3 in workbook page 38, 39
- Prepare unit 5: Looking back + project

Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: …/11/ 2015

UNIT 5: Natural wonders of the world

Period 39

LESSON 7:

LOOKING BACK + PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge:- Revise unit 5 with vocabulary , grammar and pronunciation and talk
about what they know about Viet Nam.

Skills:

+ Speaking: Ask and answer about Viet Nam.

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

Competences:- Making comparison between natural wonders.
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
- S1: Does exercise in workbook

- S2: writes a short paragraph about a place you know
2. Warm - up: (3 minute)

Encourage Ss to remember what they have learnt in this Unit
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary (8 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to revise vocabulary.

* Process:- Ex 1&2 Ss work individually
to do the exercises. Then Ss can check their
answers before discussing the answers as a
class. However, Ss should keep a record of
their answers so they can use that

information in Now you can…statement.
* Conclusion:Almost all the students can
complete the exercises

* Vocabulary

1. Label the things in nature you can 
see in this picture.

1. mountain 2. waterfall 3. forest
4. cave 5. desert 6. lake
7. beach 8. island 9. valley
2.Write the words.

1. scissors 2. sleeping bag
3. compass 4. torch

5. painkillers 6. plaster
Activity 2: Grammar (10 minutes)

* Aims: To help SS to practice
grammar and vocabulary by
completing task 3&4

* Process:

Ex3: As above, ask Ss to work
individually to work individually to
complete the sentences.

Ex4: Ask Ss to work in pair and match
the name of a natural wonder in
column A with a word/ phrase in
column B. Monitor the activity and
offer help to Ss when necessary.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students
can complete the tasks.

Grammar

3. Fill the gaps in the following sentences
1. hottest 2. longest 3. highest

4. largest 5. best

4. Match the name of a natural wonder in

…….

1- d
2- c
3- a
4- e
5- b
6- d

Activity 3: Speaking (7 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to practice the task5.

* Process: Ss read the questions and
answers once or twice. Then match them.
Write all sentences in their notebooks.
- Ss work in pairs and role-play the
questions and answers.

- Ask Ss to complete the self-assessment.
Identify any difficulties and weak areas and
provide further practice.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the tasks.

5. Work in pairs and practise the 
conversation below

A. What is Everest?

B. I think it is the highest mountain in
the world.

A. What is Loch Lomond?

B. I don’t know. Do you know it?
A. Yes. It is the largest fresh water lake
in Great Britain.

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

Activity 4: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims: To help Ss talk about what they know

about Viet Nam.
* Process:

- Divide the class into groups and ask Ss to
recall and describe some interesting places
Refer pairs to the Travelling, Weather,
Natural Attractions prompt as the bottom of
the page

Tell pairs to take turns reading their questions
to the rest of the group to answer.

- Ss work together to write down their
answers to the questions in 1. Ss can draw a
map of Viet Nam and write information on it
to create a classroom display.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students can

know how to talk about what they know about
Viet Nam.

I. Project

How well do you know Viet Nam
Eg: A: What the wettest place in Viet
Nam:

B: I think it’s……..

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the comparative adjectives and super
comparative adjectives by doing exercises.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn again the present continuous tense for future plans and vocabulary about
personality, appearance...

- Do exercises in work book
- Prepare Written test

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015 
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 40

written test 2

I. Objectives:

* Knowledge:

- To test Ss’ knowledge from unit 3 to unit 5 to know how comparative and

superlative the Ss are and find out their strength and weakness of learning

English so that teacher can give them more suitable method of teaching.

* Skills: Do the test in writing, reading and listening

* Attitude: Teach Ss to be strict and honest

*Competences: Being able to do the test well

II. Preparations

- Materials: Lesson plan, textbook

- Equipment:

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up:

3. New lesson:

MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 2

Chủ đề

Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Cộng

Thấp Cao

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ T

L KQTN TL

Listening 1.Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6

2. Listen and choose the correct answer.

Số câu hỏi 10 10

Số điểm 2,5 2,5

(25%)
Vocabulary

+ Grammar

preposition of place
,comparative,
direction and must

Comparative and
superlative

Số câu hỏi 5 5 10

Số điểm 1,25 1,25 2,5

(25%)
Reading 1.Complete the letter using the words in box

2.Read about Da Nang and answer the questions.

Số câu hỏi 6 4 10

Số điểm 1,5 1 2,5

25%)

Writting 1.Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the roof ones

2. Write a travel use the answers for these questions

Số câu hỏi 5 4

Số điểm 1,25 1,25 2,5

(25%)

Tổng số câu
Tổng số 
điểm
Tỉ lệ %

Số câu 21

Số điểm 5,25

5,25%

Số câu 9

Số điểm 2,25

2,25%

Số câu 5

Số điểm 2,5

2,25 %

Số câu

35

Số điểm

10
100%

WRITTEN TEST 2

Part A. Listening (2.5ms)

I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6. Number 1 is an example. 
(1,25 marks)

Words desert best coast boat lost boot

Number 1

II. Nick’s family are in the travel agent’s. They want to go on holiday. They are 
choosing a place from the brochure. Listen and choose the correct answer. (1,25 
marks)

1. How many places does the travel agent recommend? …………..

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

A. five B. four C. three D. two
2. Nick says: “I love the ………?.”

A. beach B. cave C. bay D. seafood

3. “Can I see a picture of the ……….. in Mui Ne?” Nick’s mom asks

A. shop B. beach C. hotel D. restaurant

4. Nick’s Dad wants to go to Ha Long Bay because it’s ………..than Mui Ne.

A. hotter B. cooler C. cheaper D. better

5. Finally, Nick’s family book ……….. for their holiday.

A. Mui Ne B. Hue C. Ha Long Bay D. Nha Trang

Part B. Language focus (2,5 ms)

I. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete these sentences. (1,25 marks)
1. I live ………… Da Nang city with my uncle and aunt.

A. from B. on C. at D. in

2. Lan is the ………at English in her class.

A. good B. better C. best D. the best

3. You ………….. do your homework at home.

A. must B. must to C. mustn’t to D. mustn’t

4. “Excuse me. Is there a souvenir shop near here?” – “Yes, there’s one ………?
A. go along B. straight ahead C. straight D. turn right

5. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

A. cave B. famous C. late D. valley

II. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets.(1,25 
marks)

1. Ha Tinh is the (hot)... of the three cities:Ha Noi, Ha Tinh and Hue.
2. Travelling by car is (comfortable) ... than by bus.
3. Studying is the (important)………... in our life.
4. Is a town house (cheap)... than a city house?
5. This is the (expensive) ... shop in my neighbourhood.
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)

I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks)

….. air ……staying ……backyard …… are …... cleaner …… noisy
Dear Nick,

I'm sorry I couldn't write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we're
(1) ...in a small hotel near a shopping area. Near my hotel, there's a cinema, and a
supermarket. There (2)... some big shops at the end of the street. It's also very
(3)... here because there's always a lot of traffic, day and night. In my
hometown I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school, a post office
but there isn't a cinema. The streets are narrower but they are (4)... and there
isn't so much traffic. The (5) ... is much fresher, too. And every house has
a (6) ... and a front yard.

II. Read about Da Nang and asnwer the questions (1,0 mark)

Da Nang has a population of nearly 800,000 people. The Han River flows through the
city. The city part on the east bank is newer and more spacious. The city part on the
west bank is more crowded. There are five bridges across the river. The Han River
Bridge is the newest one now.

The cost of living in Da Nang is lowest in Central Viet Nam. Da Nang has many
beaches. Among them, Non Nuoc Beach is the one of the most beautiful beaches in the
world. But walking in the street on a summer afternoon is not a good idea in Da Nang.
There are not many shadows. It is often very hot at noon.

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

...
2. How is the city part on the east bank?

...
3. Is the cost of living in Da Nang is highest in Central Viet Nam?

...
4. What is the weather like in Da Nang at noon?

...
Part D. Writing (2,5ms)

I. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the root ones. (1,25 
marks)

1. Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.

-> There…...
2. No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh...
3. The hospital is on the left of the museum.

-> The museum is ...
4. My house is smaller than Lan’s house.

-> Lan’s house is ...
5. Lan is Mrs Hien’s daughter.

-> Mrs Hien is ………..………

II. Write a travel guide about a natural wonder of Viet Nam you know. (1,25 
marks). You should use the answers for these questions:

1. Name a natural wonder of Viet Nam?
2. Where is it?

3. How far is it from here/your house?
4. How can you get there?

5. What is special about it?
6. What can you do there?

WRITTEN TEST 2

Part A. Listening (2.5ms)

I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6. Number 1 is an example. 
(1,25 marks)

Words desert best coast boat lost boot

Number 1

II. Nick’s family are in the travel agent’s. They want to go on holiday. They are 
choosing a place from the brochure. Listen and choose the correct answer. (1,25 
marks)

1. How many places does the travel agent recommend? …………..

A. five B. four C. three D. two

2. Nick says: “I love the ………?.”

A. beach B. cave C. bay D. seafood

3. “Can I see a picture of the ……….. in Mui Ne?” Nick’s mom asks

A. shop B. beach C. hotel D. restaurant

4. Nick’s Dad wants to go to Ha Long Bay because it’s ………..than Mui Ne.

A. hotter B. cooler C. cheaper D. better

5. Finally, Nick’s family book ……….. for their holiday.

A. Mui Ne B. Hue C. Ha Long Bay D. Nha Trang

Part B. Language focus (2,5 ms)

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

I. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete these sentences. (1,25 marks)
1. I live ………… Da Nang city with my uncle and aunt.

A. from B. on C. at D. in

2. Lan is the ………at English in her class.

A. good B. better C. best D. the best

3. You ………….. do your homework at home.

A. must B. must to C. mustn’t to D. mustn’t

4. “Excuse me. Is there a souvenir shop near here?” – “Yes, there’s one ………?
A. go along B. straight ahead C. straight D. turn right

5. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

A. cave B. famous C. late D. valley

II. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets.(1,25 
marks)

I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks)

….. air ……staying ……backyard …… are …... cleaner
…… noisy

Dear Nick,

II. Read about Da Nang and asnwer the questions (1,0 mark)

1. Which bridge is the newest one now?

...
2. How is the city part on the east bank?

...
3. Is the cost of living in Da Nang is highest in Central Viet Nam?

...
4. What is the weather like in Da Nang at noon?

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

I. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the root ones. (1,25 
marks)

1. Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.

-> There…...
2. No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh...
3. The hospital is on the left of the museum.

-> The museum is ...
4. My house is smaller than Lan’s house.

-> Lan’s house is ...
5. Lan is Mrs Hien’s daughter.

-> Mrs Hien is ………..………

II. Write a travel guide about a natural wonder of Viet Nam you know. (1,25 
marks)

You should use the answers for these questions:
1. Name a natural wonder of Viet Nam?
2. Where is it?

3. How far is it from here/your house?
4. How can you get there?

5. What is special about it?
6. What can you do there?

4. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- T hands in the papers and gives remarks.

5. Intended test and evaluation: (1 minutes)

- Prepare the next lesson .

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 41

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge:- Extend and practise vocabulary related to Tet : things, activities, and
practices.

- Listen and read an interview about New Year for details..
- Practice about Tet of Viet Nam.

*Skills: + Writing: Write the words/phrases to the appropriate pictures.

+ Listening: Listen to the conversation between Phong and an interviewer about Tet.
+ Reading: Read the conversation and do T or F.

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
*Competences: Talking about how to prepare for Tet.

II. Preparations

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: 
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

- Ask Ss what they expect to hear in the listening like: “ What will they talk about?”
When is Tet this year?

What do you do at Tet?
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify their
meanings and use them to make sentences and
know what they are going to listen.

* Process:

- Write the word Tet on the board and ask Ss to
give any words they know relating to the topic.
- guide Ss to do exercise 4 to understand the
newwords

* Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/ real
object/ translation/ situation

Checking
* Conclusion:

- Almost all the students understand the new
words might be used and what they are going to

listen.

I. Getting started

4. Write the words/ phrase in the 
box under …..

1. b: peach blossom and apricot
blossom

2. a : lucky money

3. c: banh chung and banh tet
4. e : swimming pool

5. h : school ground
6. g : books

7. f : house decorate
8. d : family gathering

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)
* Aims:

- SS get the content of the conversation
between two people and the complete the
exercises.

* Process:

- Play the recording. Ss listen and read.
Check to make sure that pronounce the key
words correctly.

Ex2: Ss work independently. Ideally ask
them to answer the questions without
referring to the listening. Then allow them
to share their answers with their partners
before discussing as a class. Ask them to
explain why they think a statement is false
and they can correct it.

Ex3: This work can be done independently
or in pairs. Tell Ss to refer back to the
conversation to find

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand the
conversation and complete the exercises.

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

2. Are the following statements true or 
false….

1.F
2. F

3. F
4.T
5.T

3. Find the information from 1 and fill 
the blanks.

1. This year we will have Tet at the end of
January.

2. We decorate our house.
3. We buy flowers and plants.
4. We shouldn’t buy fireworks

5. We eat great food and get lucky money
during Tet

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

* Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and writing
skill by doing some exercises

* Process:

Ex5: Ss can easily answer this queston by
reffering to the pictures

Ex6: T will demonstrate this game by
using the board or taking a piece of paper
and writing three things/ activities T likes

about Tet.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
tasks.

III. Further practice

5.Look at the pictures again…..
About Tet: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8

6.Game. Write down three thing or 
activities you like best about Tet

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Talk about specific information about Tet
holiday.

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn new works by heart

- Read the conversation again

- Do exercises + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese
- Prepare: Unit 6: A closer look 1

Preparation day: /11 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 11/ 2015 6B: ……/11/ 2015 6E: ……/ 11 / 2015

Period 42

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge

:- Practise vocabulary related to Tet : things, activities, and practices.
- Know hot to pronounce the sounds /s/ and / ∫ /

- Find out the words with the sounds /s/ and / ∫ / to talk about Tet.
*Skills: + Writing: Write the words related to tet.

+ Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /s/ and / ∫ /
they hear.

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
*Competences: - Talking about things and activities for Tet.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: to go to the board to write new words
S2: does exercises in workbook

2.Warm - up: (3 minutes) – Ss play games Chatting: 
- Tell me three things you like best about Tet.

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (15 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,
identify their meanings.

* Process:

- Teach new words: visual aids/
translation/ pictures

- T: writes new words on the board
- Checking: rub out and remember
- Ask Ss to match the words they know.
- Ask Ss to work in group. Point out
irregular plurals using the “watch out”
box.

- Ex2: Ask Ss to look at the pictures first
and see if they know the words. Then
ask them to do the matching.

Ex3: Explain some verbs and nouns go
together and some don’t.

Eg: plant/ decorate a tree but not cook a
tree.

Ex4: This activity is to help Ss
remember the vocabulary used in
combination.

* Conclusion: Students know new
words and complete the exercises.

I. Vocabulary

1. Listen and repeat the words.
wish:

fireworks:
furniture:
present:
shopping:
tree:
flower:
relative:
pagoda:
calendar:
special food:

2. Work in groups. Label the pictures 
with the words in 1.

Key: 1.b 2. I 3. d 4. j 5. f 6. g

7. h 8. e 9. k 10. c 11. A

3. Match the verbs with the suitable nouns.
1 .cook special food.

2. go to a pagoda
3. give lucky money
4. visit relatives
5. clean the furniture
6. decorate our house
7. plant trees

8. make a wish
9. hang a calendar
10. watch fireworks
11. do the shopping
12. buy peach blossoms
Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation (10 minutes)
* Aims: Hepl Ss to learn and practice the

sounds /s/ and / ∫ /.

* Process: Practise the sounds /∫/ and /s/ together.
T may write two Vietnamese words on the board
first

Eg: “xach” “sach”. Ask Ss to say the words
aloud and draw their attention to the difference
in the pronunciation of the two words.

-Check if they do this correctly.

- Ask Ss to look at the sentences first and
underline any words they think contain the

II. Pronunciation: Sounds /∫/ and 
/s/.

5.Listen and repeat the words
/s/.: blossoms. summer, rice,
celebrate, school, special, spring
/∫/: She , shopping, should, wish,
rubbish

6.Listen to the sentences…..
/∫/: 2, 3, 5

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

sounds /∫/ and /s/. After that T plays the
recording and Ss listen and decide which
sentence has /s/ and which sentence has /∫/.
* Conclusion: Almost all the students can know
pronounce the sounds: /t/ and /st/ in isolation and
in context

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims: Hepl Ss to learn and practice the

sounds /s / and / ∫ /.

* Process: Allow Ss to practise reading the

poem among themselves. Ask them to pay
attention to the key words with /∫/ and /s/.
* Conclusion:Almost all the students can know
pronounce the sounds: / s / and / ∫ / in isolation
and in context

III.Further- Practice

7- Listen and practise reading a short
poem…..

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds / s / and/ ∫ / in isolation and in
context and vocabulary

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare unit 6: Closer look 2

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015 
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án 
.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: …/ / 2015

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

Period 43

LESSON 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

*Knowledge: - Identify and practise the language of intentions (with “will”) and advice
(with “should”)

- Talk about what they should or shouldn't do during Tet
- Practice talking about their intention for Tet.

* Skills: + Speaking: Practice speaking with should/shouldn’t; will/won’t.
+ Writing: Make up sentences with should/shouldn’t; will/won’t

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
*Competences: Expressing concern and giving advice.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: goes to the board to write new words

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

S2: does B1 in workbook

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) Brainstorming race

Be quiet listen to the teacher talk loudly
3- New lesson: (35 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching structure ( 12 minutes)
* Aims:

Help Ss to identify and practise the
language of intentions (with “will”)
and advice (with “should”)

* Process:

- Grammar: Should/ Shouldn’t
- Explain the use of should/
shouldn’t/ will/ won’t.
* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can use the language
of intentions (with “will”) and
advice (with “should”)fluently.

II. Grammar.
* Should/Shouldn’t

We use should for things that are good to do.

We use shouldn’t for things that are bad to do.
Eg: “ Nam , you shouldn’t wet the floor. You
should take your raincoat first.

* Will/ Won’t

We use will + verb for future intentions.
We use will not or won’t + verb for things we
don’t plan to do in future.

+) S + will + Vinf + O/A.
-) S + won’t+ Vinf + O/A.

?) (Wh) + will + S + Vinf + O/A.
Eg: My father will repaint our house.
We won’t buy banh chung.

* Watch out:

Don’t use “to” with will or won’t
Eg: Dad will to repaint the house x
Dad will repaint the house 
Activity 2: Practice ( 18 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss to talk about what they
should or shouldn't do during Tet
- Practice talking about their
intention for Tet.

* Process: - Do exercises in the
book

Ex1: Use the pictures and the
language acquired in the previous
activity to practise the target
language of should/ shouldn’t in
more familiar situations. Ask Ss to
complete the four sentences. Make
sure that they combine should and
the verb correctly.

Ex2: Ask Ss to look at the four signs
in the studio and let them complete

II. Practice

* Should/ shouldn’t
Ex1: Key

1, shouldn’t 2. should 3. shouldn’t
4. should

Ex2: Key

1. should 2. shouldn’t 3. should
4. shouldn’t

Ex3:

Activities

1. behave well  5. go out with
friends 
2. eat lots of sweets

X 6. make a wish 

3. plant trees  7. fight X
4. break things X 8. play cards all

night X
Bad things to do in class

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

the sentences. Draw their attention
to the fact that it is a TV studio
where people are working. Go
round and see if they write the
sentence correctly.

Ex3: The phrases illastrated by
pictures make their meanings clear.
Ss can do the ticking and crossing
easily.

Ex4: Ss write the sentences by
referring to the activities in 3. Go
round and check for any spelling or
grammar mistakes.

Will/ won’t

Ex1: Revise some words
- Read the letter.

- Who wrote the letter?
- What will his father do?
Draw Ss’ attention to the use of
will/ won’t

Ex2: Ss’ writing

- Check that they don’t make any
mistakes.

* Conclusion: Almost all Ss can
complete the exercises

Ex4:

1. We should behave well.

2. We shouldn’t eat lots of sweets.
3. We should plant trees.

4. We shouldn’t break things.
5. We should go out with friends.
6. We should make a wish.
7. We shouldn’t fight.

8. We shouldn’t play cards all night.
* Will/ won’t

Ex2:

1. My father will repaint our house.
2. I will go shopping with Mum.
3. We will buy red envelopes.

4. I will help my parents cook banh chung.
5. I’ll write again soon.

6.We won’t buy fireworks.
7.We won’t buy banh chung.
Ex3:

1. Phong will visit his relatives.
2. Phong will go to a pagoda.
3. Phong will go out.

4. Phong won’t study.

5. Phong won’t give a present.
Activity 4: Production (5minutes)

*Aims:

- Ss know how to use should/ shouldn’t and
will / won’t to give orders

*Process: Emphasise that Ss write TRUE
sentences of what Phong will/won’t do at
Tet. T also reminds them of the kind of
words they have to add in order to complete
the sentences.

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students can
do the exercises.

III. Further practice
Ex 4:

1. Phong will visit his relatives.
2. Phong will go to a pagoda.
3. Phong will go out.

4. Phong won’t study.

5. Phong won’t give a present.

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Identify and practise the language of intentions
(with “will”) and advice (with “should”)

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn by heart the new words

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

Preparation day: / 12 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 12/ 2015 6B: ……/12 / 2015 6E: ……/12 / 2015

Period 44:

TEST CORRECTION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

- Knowledge: Know the mistakes they’ve made in the test and correct their mistakes
- Skills: reading, writing

- Attitude: Realize their mistakes and need to learn more carefully
II. Preparations

- Materials: Lesson plan, test paper
- Equipment: stereo, tape English 6
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up: (5 minutes) Play bingo (kinds of clothing)
3. New lesson: (35 minutes)

Teacher’s and students’
activities

Main contents
Activity 1: Correcst the test (35 minutes)
Aims: Students know their

mistakes, how to correct

Đề 1:

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

them.
* Process:

T presents the mistakes that
Ss in the test

Ss listen and correct
themselves

T calls two Ss do the
exercise on the board and
asks the rest to do the
exercise on their papers
T shows some common
mistakes

I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6.
* Tape transcript: (new Tieng Anh 6 - Unit 5: A close

look 1 – Activity 4, Track 42)

Words boat desert best boot coast lost
Numbe

r

2 6 1 5 3 4

II. Listen and choose the correct answer. (1,25 marks)
* Tape transcript: (new Tieng Anh 6 - Unit 5: Skills 2 –
Track 46, 47)

1. D. four 3. A. hotel 5.

D. Ha Long Bay

2. C. beach 4. B. better

Part B: (2,5 điểm) - Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm
I. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete 
these sentences. (1,25 marks)

1. C. at 3. D. mustn’t 5.

A. weather

2. B. better 4. B. straight ahead
II. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate forms of the
adjectives in brackets. (1,25 marks)

wettest 2. cheaper 3. more important 4. more expensive 5. most beautiful
Part C: (2,5 điểm) - Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm
I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 
marks)

1.
staying

2.
are

3.
noisy

4.
cleaner

5.
air

backyard
II. Read about Da Nang and answer the questions (1,0
mark)

1. The Han River flows through the city.
2. It is more crowded.

3. Yes, it is.

4. It is often very hot at noon.
Part D. Writing (2,5ms)

I. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same 
meaning as the root ones.(1,25 marks)

1. There are many beautiful beaches in Viet Nam.
2. Minh is the tallest in my class.

3. The museum is in front of the hospital.
5. Kien is Mr Hung’s son.

4. Lan’s house is more expensive than my house.
II. Write a travel guide about a natural wonder of 
Viet Nam you know. (1,25 marks)

Example:

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

kilometers from here. You can get there by car or by
bus/train. It has many beautiful flowers and sometimes it
has snowfalls in winter. You can visit some tribal

villages, love market and take many photos there. I hope
you can visit Sa Pa soon.

Part A: (2,5 điểm) - Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm
I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6.
* Tape transcript: (new Tieng Anh 6 - Unit 5: A close

look 1 – Activity 4, Track 42)

Words desert best coast boat lost boot

Number 6 1 3 2 4 5

II. Listen and choose the correct answer. (1,25 marks)
* Tape transcript: (new Tieng Anh 6 - Unit 5: Skills 2 –
Track 46, 47)

1. B. four 3. C. hotel

5. C. Ha Long Bay

2. A. beach 4. D. better

Part B: (2,5 điểm) - Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm
I. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete 
these sentences. (1,25 marks)

1. D. in 3. A. must

5. D. valley

2. C. best 4. B. straight

ahead

II. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate forms of the
adjectives in brackets. (1,25 marks)

hottest 2. more comfortable 3. most important 4. cheaper 5. most expensive
Part C: (2,5 điểm) - Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 điểm

I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 
marks)

staying 2. are 3. noisy 4. cleaner 5. air 6. backyard
II. Read about Da Nang and answer the questions (1,0
mark)

1. The Han River Bridge is the newest one now.
2. It is newer and more spacious.

3. No, it isn’t.

4. It is often very hot at noon.
Part D. Writing (2,5ms)

I. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same 
meaning as the root ones.(1,25 marks)

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

* Conclusion:

All students realize their
mistakes and can correct
them

4. Lan’s house is bigger than my house.

II. Write a travel guide about a natural wonder of 
Viet Nam you know. (1,25 marks)

Example:

There are many natural wonders of Viet Nam but I think
Ha Long Bay is the best. You can get there by car or by
bus/coach. It has many beautiful caves and islands. Tuan
Chau island is the biggest. You can swim on Chay beach,
see the caves and eat delicious seafood and you can take
many photos there. I hope you can visit Ha Long Bay
soon/ someday/ next summer

4. Practice and consolidation (3 minutes)

- Teacher remind Ss to study harder, more carefully

5. Subsequent activites (2 minutes)

- Prepare the new lesson: unit 4: Communication.

Preparation day: /12 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 12/ 2015 6B: ……/12/ 2015 6E: …/12/ 2015

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

Period 45

LESSON 4 :

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need
*Knowledge:

- Read about New Year celebrations in different countries.

- Know how they celebrate their New Year

- Practice talking about New Year celebrations
*Skills:

+ Speaking: Speak the name of the countries with their flags.
+ Reading: Read the text about Tet in some countries.

*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
*Competences: Describing what people do at Tet Holiday.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

- Retell the way to use should/ shouldn’t and will/ won’t

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes): Have Ss play game “ spider-web of words ”
Vietnam Thailand

China Japan
England

Ammerica
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read new

words, identify their meanings and use
them to make sentences.

*Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/
example.

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: : matching game in 5 
*Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

I. Vocabulary

Feather (n)

To stick (v)

To throw (ST over Sb) (v)

To ring ( a bell) (v)

To believe (in ST/ SB ) (v)

To remove (v)

To cool down (v)

First-footer (n)

5. Find and check the meaning of some new 
words using the definitions.

Ansers:

a, feather – the covers of the roosters ,
chickens or birds .

b, cool down – become colder
c, remove – take away

d, first footer – the first person to enter \
your home after New Year’s Eve .
NOTE: Nationalities

Activity 2: Speaking ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to know how to speak the
name of the countries with their flags.
And read about New Year celebrations
in different countries.

* Process:

Have Ss play game MATCHING

II. Speak

1. Match the flags with the countries.

Then match with their naionalities.

Countries Nationalities
1, Holland

2, Japan
3, USA
4, Australia
5, Thailand
6, Vietnam
7, Scotland
8, Korea

Dutch
Japanese
American
Australian
Thai
Vietnames
Scottish
Koeran
 2. Ask and answer about their

Names of

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

Have Ss work in pairs to talk about their
nationalities

Cross -check

Ask Ss to lokk at the phrases and the
pictures , then match.

Ask Ss to work in groups of four to read
the text and answer the question

Call some groups to represent their
works .

Give the answers
* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks

nationalities

S1 : Wher are you from ?

/ Where do you come from ?
S2: I am / come from ...Vietnam....
S1 : You are ... Vietnames ....?
S2 ? Yes, that’s right .

3. Match the four groups of people with 
the right pictures .

Ans: 1- The Scottish , Scotland
2, The Thai , Thailand
3, The H’Mong , VietNam
4, The Japanese , Japan

4. Read the text and answer the quetion 
below .

Which group of people celebrates
New Year in that way ?

How to celebrate... People
a, ...

b, ...
c, ...
d, ...

a, H’Mong
b, Thai
c, Japanese
d, Scottish

Activity 3: Further practice ( 8 minutes)
*Aims:

Ss can describe what people do at Tet
Holiday.

*Process:

Have Ss work individually to choose two
facts from the paragraphs

Call some Ss to represent before the class
Feedback

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice
speaking skill.

III. Further practice

6. Choose and write down , then read
aloud.

...
...
...
...
...
...

( Ss’ own answers )
4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Ss describe what people do at Tet Holiday
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words
- Do C2 , D1 ( workbook)
- Prepare for the next lesson

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /12 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 12/ 2015 6B: ……/12/ 2015 6E: …/12/ 2015

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

Period 46

LESSON 5 :

SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: - Read about New Year celebrations in different countries.
- Know how they celebrate their New Year

- Practice talking about some beliefs on New Year celebrations
*Skills: + Speaking: Talk about you should/shouldn’t do at Tet.
+ Reading: Get to know New Year practices in some other countries.
*Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday

*Competences: Reading about facts of the New Year’s practices in Viet Nam and
some other countries.

II. Preparations

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: Does C2 - workbook S2: writes new words
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) * Networds .

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary (7 minutes)
* Aims: SS know how to read new

words, get their meanings.
* Process:

- Teach vocabulary: translation/
example/ pictures

- T: Writes new words on the board.
- Ss: listen and repeat in individual
first then the whole class.

- Call 3 - 4 SS to read the words again

Cheking: Rub out and remember
* Conclusion: - Almost all the

students know new words and how to
use them.

I. Vocabulary

- welcome (v)

- strike (v)

- cheer (v)

- bow (v)

- show (v)

- repect (v)

- believe (v)

=> belief (n)

Rich => richness (n)

sucess (n)

Happy => happiness (n)
Poor => poverty (n)

shrimp (n)

Activity 2: Reading (15 minutes)
* Aims:

To help SS to get information
about New Year celebrations in
different countries and know how
they celebrate their New Year and
do some exercises

* Process:
- Pre - reading

- T asks Ss to read the study skills
box

- Ss look at the text and answer the
questions.

- T asks for Ss answers.

II. Read

1. Read the passages and say who the 
following statements refer to.

A. Russ B. Wu C. Mai

Statements Who
1. A dog is a good present

2. The child goes to Times Square 
to welcome New Year

3. The cild gets lucky money .
4. The child likes watching

colourful fireworks.

5. Giving rice is wishing for a year 
ful of food .

6. The child dresses beautifully in 
red .

C
A
B
A
C
B

Tet beliefs

happy

Have sucess

Become very rich

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

* While -reading

- T asks Ss to read the text (task 2)
- Ss work in groups.

- Ask Ss to work in pair to read the
text again and answer the questions
(task 3)

- T calls Ss to the board to write the
answer

* Post - speaking:

- Ask Ss to will / won’t and should/
shouldn’t

* Conclusion

Almost all the students can get the
information and do the tasks well.

7. One shouldn’t eat shrimps at the

New Year festival. C

2. Tick the things which appear in the 
passages and cross the ones which don’t.
Answers :

Appear : a ,b , d , e , f , g ,l 
Don’t appear : c, h , j 
*. Grammar : ( Review)

A, Will/ Won’t => making plans / intentions 
for the future.

Eg: I will visit my grandparents on the 1st

NewYear Day .

He won’t go to pagoda on New Year.
B, Should / Shouldn’t => giving advice. 
Eg: We should give rice to wish for enough 
food .

We shouldn’t eat shrimp at Tet holiday
Activity 3: Speaking (8 minutes)

* Aims:

- SS further practice speaking skill
by talking about you

should/shouldn’t do at Tet..
* Process:

* Pre - speaking:

- Ask SS to work individually
* While - speaking:

- Ss talk to your friends the things
you will do / won’t do this New
Year

* Post - speaking:

- Ask SS to write two popular beliefs
you know about the New Year in
your country

* Conclusion:

- Alomost all the students can
practice speaking skill by
completing the tasks

III. Speaking

3. Talk to your friends the things you will 
do / won’t do this New Year.

1. I won’t go to Times Square to welcome the
New Year.

2. I will have a time full of fun
3. I will get lucky money from my

grandparents .

4. I won’t give my cousin a cat as a gitf
5. We won’t eat shrimps .

6. We will cheer and sing when...
7. I will dress beautifully in red .

8. We will go to watch the firewoks display.
4. Write two popular beliefs you know about 
the New Year in your country .

Belief 1 : I

will ...
Belief 2 : I

won’t ...
5. Look at the list and discuss with your 
friends what you Should / Shouldn’t do at 
Tet holiday . ( Noughts and Crosses)

Play games

all night Get up early Invite friendshome 
Buy some

salt

Bring home

a black cat

Ask for lucky
money

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

loud rubbish....
Start like this :

We shoukd / shouldn’t...
4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: The information about know more about New
Year celebrations in different countries

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- How well do you know about Viet Nam
- Learn by heart all the new words.

- Do Ex C1, D2,3 ( workbook )
- Prepare unit 5: Skill 2

Preparation day: /12 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 12/ 2015 6B: ……/12/ 2015 6E: …/12/ 2015

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

Period 47

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: - Listen to a dialogue between Mai and her Mom about their shoppnig for
Tet for details.

- Write an e-mail about Tet activities.
Skills:

+ Writing: Write complete sentences from prompts and write a short guided passage.
+ Listening: Listen amd do exercises.

Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday
Competences:

-Writing short paragraph about what you should /shouldn’t do at Tet
.II. Preparations

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute)

S1: Does exercise C1 in work book S2: writes new works.
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

3.New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening ( 15 minutes)
*Aims: - Listen to a dialogue between Mai

and her Mom about their shopping for Tet for
details

*Process: 
* Pre listening:

- T lets Ss to look at the list and read them
aloud. Make sure they pronounce the words
correctly.

* While –listening

- T plays the recording and ask Ss which
words from the list they can hear. Draw Ss’
attention to the positive and negative forms of
the verbs and other signals for

positive/negative answers. Ex: yes, dear. We
don’t. No, dear...

- Ask Ss to look carefully at the list of things
Mai and her mother will buy.

- Get Ss to focus on the list of people in
exercise 2 while listening.

* Post- listening:

- T elicits the use of “will/won’t”,
should/shouldn’t” from Ss.

*Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercise.

I. Listening

1. Mai and her mother are going 
shopping for Tet. Listen and tick 
…….

Key: 1. Peach blossoms
3.new clothes.

4.A tie
5.Sweet

7. chocolate biscuits

2. Listen again and right the names 
of the things…..

A. people B. things
1.Mai and her brother clothes

2. Mai’s dad A tie

3.Mai’s grandparents Some
sweets

Activity 2: Writing ( 15 minutes)

*Aims: To help SS to write complete

sentences from prompts and write a short
guided passage.

* Process:

*Pre writing: - Ss write an e-mai to a friend
about their Tet holiday including what they
will and won’t do. Also include things people
should and shouldn’t do.

II. Writing

3.Write an e-mail to a friend about
your Tet holiday.

Dear Trang Linh,

I feel very happy and excited. Our
Tet is coming.

This year I will dress beautiful
clothes. I will visit my relatives and

Peach blossoms

sweets

decorations

Chung cakes

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

*While writing: - Teacher may allow

advanced students to get out of the framework
and write as they like.

- Ss work individually, then compare the
answers with their partners.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can write an e-mai to a
friend about their Tet holiday

invite my friends home.

I won’t play games all night and
break things. I also won’t set off
firecrackers.

At Tet, people should behave well
and give each other best wishes.
People shouldn’t drink too much
wine, especially when driving.

Write to me soon,
Love,

Ngoc
4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Write an e-mail about Tet activities.
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Do exercise E1 + E2,3 in workbook page 46, 47
- Prepare unit 6: Looking back + project

Preparation day: /12 / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 12/ 2015 6B: ……/12/ 2015 6E: …/12/ 2015

UNIT 6: our tet holiday

Period 48

LESSON 7:

LOOKING BACK + PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge- Recycle the language from the previous sections and links with the topics.
- Practice doing some exercises to consolidate and apply what they have learnt in Unit6
Skills: + Writing: Write the three dreams for this New Year

+ Listening: Listen and fill in the summary with should/shouldn’t.
Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday
Competences:

- Talking about what what people will/won’t or should/shouldn’t do at Tet
.III. Teaching process:

- Materials: Textbook, pictures of Thailand’s Tet
- Equipment:

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- S2: writes an e-mail about Tet activities.
2. Warm - up: (3 minute)

Encourage Ss to remember what they have learnt in this Unit
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary (8 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to revise

vocabulary.

* Process:- Ex 1&2 Ss work
individually to do the exercises.
Then Ss can check their answers
before discussing the answers as
a class. However, Ss should keep
a record of their answers so they
can use that information in Now
you can…statement.

* Conclusion:Almost all the
students can complete the
exercises

* Vocabulary

1. Draw lines to match the actions on the left 
with the things on the right.

1. j 2. e 3. d

4. c 5. i 6. f

7. h 8. g 9. a

10. k 11. b 12. l

2. Games : About and Not about
Example :

Sa: play games
Sb: about Tet
Sc: go swimming
Sd: not about Tet

Activity 2: Grammar (10 minutes)
* Aims: To help SS to practice

grammar and vocabulary by
completing task 3&4

* Process:

Show Ss a picture of New Year
in Thailand and asks if they
could still remember anything
about New Year Festival in
Thailand.

When is New Year Festival in

Thailand?

What is the weather like?

Grammar

A, Will/ Won’t => making plans / intentions for
the future.

3. Write sentences about Phong’s plans.

Will Will not/ Won’t
1. P will travel by

plane 
2. P will wear

shorts and 
T-shirts.

3. P will get wet.

1. P won’t stay at
home.

2. P won’t eat banh
chung

3. P won’t go to
school.

About Tet

- Play games

- ...

Not About Tet

- go swimming

- ...

Not About Tet

go swimming

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

Will people throw water at each 
other?

How can you travel in Thailand?

asks Ss to write full sentences
Checks with the whole class
-T elicits the language being
practiced in this activity: model
verb " shou;d/ shouldn’t".

-T asks Ss look at the summary
first and then to listen and fill in
the blank individually.

-Ss can share answers with their
partners.

- Gives feedback and retell how
to use “should/ shouldn’t”

* Conclusion: Almost all the
students can complete the tasks.

4. P will throw 
water at others .
5. P will watch the

elephants.

4. P won’t get lucky
money.

5. P won’t wait for
the firstfooter.
B, Should / Shouldn’t => giving advice.
4. Listen and fill in the gaps .

Answers:
1. should
2. should
3. should
4. shouldn’t
5. shouldn’t
6. should

Activity 3: Speaking (7 minutes)

*Aims: To help Ss to practice the

task5.

* Process: Gives the meaning of
some words: good health, success,
long life

Asks Ss to practise to make a wish
Wish you + noun

Guides Ss to different kinds of
dreams fro themselves and for
others.

Encourages Ss to have dreams
which might be impossible to
become true. (Tet will be longer, I
will fly to the moon…)*

Conclusion: Almost all the students
can complete the tasks.

make sentences with: WISH YOU ….

I wish you a good health.
I wish you great success
I wish you a long life.

Activity 5.

Rearrange the words to make New Year wishes
and greetngs

o I wish you a Happy New Year.

o Have a great year with your studies.

o I wish you success in your career.

o I wish you a joyful year.

Activity 4: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims: To help Ss to write the three

dreams for this New Year
* Process:

Divide the class into 6 groups

- Have Ss work in groups to design
and decorate their posters about this
dream

- T observe

* Conclusion: Almost all the students
can know how to write the three
dreams for this New Year.

I. Project

6. Make your wishes for this Tet holiday 
using Will / Won’t.

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: write the three dreams for this New Year
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

Make 5 sentences using Will for plan and 5 sentences using Should for advice
- Do exercises in work book

- Prepare next lesson

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2015 
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án 
.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 49

Review 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

* Knowledge:

- Revise all the learnt words and structures from unit 4 to unit 6. They can make

sentences using them.

- Do some exercises in the form/tense of the verbs pronunciation, vocab,

grammar from unit 4 to unit 6

* Skills: + Speaking : Pronounce the sounds they’ve learnt, use everyday English

fluently.

+ Writing: Use the comparative and superlative adjectives; modals verbs: must,

will/won’t/ , shouldn’t/should.

*Attitude: Know the importance of revision and need to study harder.

*Competences: Doing exercises on pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar and

everyday English

II. Preparations

- Materials: - A list of grammar and structures from unit to unit 3

- Some ex and their keys

- Equipment: Extra boards

We have a dream.

This year , we will /

won’t ...

.

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: during the lesson

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Ask some questions

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Language (27’)

Aims: Ss review all pronunciation,

vocabulary, main grammar,

vocabulary and everyday English

they’ve learnt from Unit 1-3.

Process:

Pronunciation

- Ask sts exercise 1 and 3

individually

- T goes around the class to help

weak sts

- Get feedback

Vocabulady

- Aks sts to do exercise 3 in pairs

- Give feedback

- Then have sts write the words in

correct groups

Let sts do this ex by playing game

Get sts to work individually

Grammar

- Ask sts to repeat the two tenses

they have learnt: present simple and

present continuous

- Ask sts to write the form on the

board

- Have sts do exercise 6, 7

I. Language

1. Pronunciation

Ex 1: Odd one out

1. d 2.c 3.c 4.a 5.b

Ex 2: write the name of the school things

and furniture in the house which begin with

/b/ and /p/.

/b/: book, bag, bed...

/p/: pen, pencil, picture, poster....

2. Vocabulary

Ex3: Complete the words

1. English

2. Homework

3. Lunch

4. Sports

5. badminton

6. Phycis

7. lesson

8. Judo

Write the words in the correct group

Play: sports, badminton

Do: homework, judo

Have: lunch, physics, English, a lesson

Study: lesson, English, physics

Ex 4: Do the crossword puzzle

1. Wardrobe

2. dining room

3. living room

4. hall

5. apartment

6. poster

Ex 5: Choose the correct words

1. quiet

2. shy

3. hard - working

4. patient

5. sporty

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

Ask Ss to read the text carefully and

pay attention to the hinst

- individually

* Conclusion:

- Ss can remember and understand

the use of these structures

2. do you have

3. am not going out/ am doing

4. likes/is

5. is

Ex 7: Complete the description with the

correct form of the verbs “be” and “have”

1. is 2. isn’t 3. Doesn’t have 4. Is

5. has 6. Are 7. Is 8. Is

Activity 2: Exercises (10’)

Aims: Help Ss to the exercises

Process:

T gives the exercises on the board and asks Ss to

do in their notebooks, and then give the answers

before class.

T and Ss correct the answers

Exercise 1: Insert the right verb forms

1. James and his brother (play)... soccer at the

moment?

2. look! A car (come)...

3. Lan and Nam (see)... a new film tonight

4. (Nam/work)...in the garden (eat)...

every day?

5. How much rice your children (eat)... every

day?

6. Every evening, my father

(watch)...television..

7. Linda (not write)... to David at this time.

8. where...Mai (be) now?

She (play)...in the garden

Exercise 2: odd one out

1. A. noodle B. food C. door

D. Stool

2. A. take B. game C. gray D. hand

3. A. buses B. goes C. boxes D. couches

4. A. Music B. lunch C.mum D. up

5. A. ear B. heavy C. head D. bread

Conclusion:

- Ss do these exercises well

II. Exercise

Keys

Exercise 1:

1. Are playing

2. Is coming

3. Are seeing

4. Is.... working

5. do...eat

6. isn’t writing

7. is Mai/is playing

Exercises 2:

1. B. food

2. D.hand

3. B. goes

4. A. musis

5. A. ear

4. Practice and consolidation:

(3 minutes)

- Correct the ex. If necessary

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Prepare Skills

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 50

REVISION

I. Objectives:

Knowledge: Revise all the grammar structures from unit 1 to unit 6

* Ss do all the exercises correctly based on the learnt grammar

Skills: Practice doing exercises in oral and writing.

Attitude: Teach Ss to study harder

Competences:

- Using grammar and vocabulary that they’ve learnt to complete all exercises to

develop 4 skills

II. Preparations

- Materials: - A list of grammar and structures from unit to unit 3

- Some ex and their keys

- Equipment: Extra boards

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: during the lesson

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Ask some questions

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Language (27’)

Aims: Ss review all pronunciation,

vocabulary, main grammar,

I. Language

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

vocabulary and everyday English

they’ve learnt from Unit 1-6.

Process:

Pronunciation

- Ask sts exercise 1 and 3

individually

- T goes around the class to help

weak sts

- Get feedback

Vocabulady

- Aks sts to do exercise 3 in pairs

- Give feedback

- Then have sts write the words in

correct groups

Let sts do this ex by playing game

Get sts to work individually

Grammar

- Ask sts to repeat the two tenses

they have learnt: present simple and

present continuous

- Ask sts to write the form on the

board

- Have sts do exercise 6, 7

Ask Ss to read the text carefully and

pay attention to the hinst

- individually

* Conclusion:

- Ss can remember and understand

the use of these structures

continuous tense.

Ex 1: Odd one out

1. d 2.c 3.c 4.a 5.b

Ex 2: write the name of the school things

and furniture in the house which begin with

/b/ and /p/.

/b/: book, bag, bed...

/p/: pen, pencil, picture, poster....

2. Vocabulary

Ex3: Complete the words

1. English

2. Homework

3. Lunch

4. Sports

5. badminton

6. Phycis

7. lesson

8. Judo

Write the words in the correct group

Play: sports, badminton

Do: homework, judo

Have: lunch, physics, English, a lesson

Study: lesson, English, physics

Ex 4: Do the crossword puzzle

1. Wardrobe

2. dining room

3. living room

4. hall

5. apartment

6. poster

Ex 5: Choose the correct words

1. quiet

2. shy

3. hard - working

4. patient

5. sporty

Ex 6: Complete the sentences

1. is raining

2. do you have

3. am not going out/ am doing

4. likes/is

5. is

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

5. has 6. Are 7. Is 8. Is

Activity 2: Exercises (10’)

Aims: Help Ss to the exercises

Process:

T gives the exercises on the board and asks Ss to

do in their notebooks, and then give the answers

before class.

T and Ss correct the answers

Exercise 1: Insert the right verb forms

1. James and his brother (play)... soccer at the

moment?

2. look! A car (come)...

3. Lan and Nam (see)... a new film tonight

4. (Nam/work)...in the garden (eat)...

every day?

5. How much rice your children (eat)... every

day?

6. Every evening, my father

(watch)...television..

7. Linda (not write)... to David at this time.

8. where...Mai (be) now?

She (play)...in the garden

Exercise 2: odd one out

1. A. noodle B. food C. door

D. Stool

2. A. take B. game C. gray D. hand

3. A. buses B. goes C. boxes D. couches

4. A. Music B. lunch C.mum D. up

5. A. ear B. heavy C. head D. bread

Conclusion:

- Ss do these exercises well

II. Exercise

Keys

Exercise 1:

1. Are playing

2. Is coming

3. Are seeing

4. Is.... working

5. do...eat

6. isn’t writing

7. is Mai/is playing

Exercises 2:

1. B. food

2. D.hand

3. B. goes

4. A. musis

5. A. ear

4. Practice and consolidation:

(3 minutes)

- Correct the ex. If necessary

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Prepare Skills

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123></div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124></div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125></div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126></div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127></div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128></div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129></div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

WEEK 21

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 7: television

Period 57

LESSON 4 :

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Know the information about the two famous children’s programs: Let’s
Learn & Hello Fatty

*Skills:

+ Reading: Read the descriptions of famous children’s programs for specific
information.

+ Writing: Complete the facts with the name of the correct country.
+ Speaking: Talk about the program you prefer.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and learn how to relax.
*Competences: identifying types of TV programmes in the world.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute)

- Retell the way to use Conjunctions and Wh-question words.
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes): Play a game: Lucky number.

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS
Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)

*Aims: - Ss know how to read new
words, identify their meanings and use
them to make sentences.

*Process:

T uses some techniques to present new
words.

Ss read after in chorus and individually.
* Checking vocab: Rub- out and

remember.

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

I. Vocabulary
clumsy (aj) vụng về
cute (aj) xinh xắn

mini-series (n): (Example to show the
meaning)

entertain (v) giải trí

Activity 2: Speaking ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to know the information
about the two famous children’s
programs: Let’s Learn & Hello Fatty
* Process:

Ss can guess:

T gives the feedback.

These questions are for discussion in
order to see how Ss feel and what they
think about television. Let them talk
freely.

T asks Ss to read the passage in silence.
Ss can use it as a model for their talk
about their favorite programme later.
When Ss finish reading, ask them to
return to activity 2 and see if they want
to change any of their previous answers.

Let Ss read the texts while they answer
the questions.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks

II. Speak

1. Complete the facts below with the name
of the correct country in the box.

Key:

1. Japan 2. Viet Nam 3. Iceland

4. the USA 5. Finland 6. Britain
2. Do you agree with the following 
statements.

1. disagree
2. agree
3. disagree
4. agree
5. not really

3a. Read about two famous TV 
programmes for children.

3b. Read the facts in the table and tick the

correct programmes.

Facts Let’s

Learn Hello Fatty
1.This programme

educates children.  

2. This programme
appears in 80 countries 
3. It’s a TV cartoon

series 

4. Both parents and

teenagers enjoy this
programme.



5. It’s a story of

adventure. 

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

*Aims:

Ss can talk about the program you prefer.
*Process:

T asks Ss to work in groups.

Ss prepare about 2-3 minutes to choose the
programme they prefer and prepare for
speaking. Encourage Ss to focus on
explaining why they like it.

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice
speaking skill.

III. Further practice

4. Read about the two programmes 
again. Tell your group which one you

prefer and why?

Ex: Vietnam Got talents is my favorite
programme I like most because…….

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Ss talk about the program you prefer.
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words
- Do exercises in the workbook.
- Prepare for the next lesson

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 7: television

Period 58

LESSON 5 :

SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Know the schedule for Around the World and do some tasks.

* Skills: + Reading: read and answer the questions/ read and choose the best program
for each.

+ Speaking: Talk about their favorite program.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and learn how to relax.
*Competences: exchanging information about TV programs.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: Does D2 – workbook - S2: writes new words

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) Guides sts to play a game: hangman
- newsreader, remote, comedy, clumsy

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

words and get their meanings.
* Process:

- Teach vocabulary: translation/
example/ pictures

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- Cheking: Rub out and remember

* Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

- instructor (n): huấn luyện viên
- wheelbarrow(n): xe cút kít
- documentary (n): phim tài liệu
- compete (v): đua tranh, đua tài
- discover (v): khám phá

- fact (n): sự thật

- universe (n): vũ trụ, vạn vật
- event (n): sự kiện

Activity 2: Reading (15 minutes)
* Aims:

To help SS to know the schedule for
Around the World and do some tasks and
do some exercises

* Process:
- Pre - reading

- Ask sts some questions about their
favorite programme on TV:

Do you like TV?
Do you like cartoons?

Do you know Tom and Jerry?
What channel do you watch it?

- Teacher shows the students the schedule,
then asks ss to answer some simple

questions to explore contend of the
schedule (the time, the name of the
programme and its contents…)
* While -reading

- Ask ss to read the schedule carefully in 5
minutes to answer the following questions
about it.

* Post - speaking:

Sts can do individually or in groups of
2-3. Read the information about the people
and choose the best programme for each.
* Conclusion

Almost all the students can get the
information and do the tasks well.

II. Read

1. Reading schedule:
Sts answer the questions.

- What time do you watch Animal
programme? – At 8 o’clock

- What time do you watch a game show?
What is its contents?- It’s Children are
always right.

- Do you like sports?...
(Depends on teachers)

2. Answer the following questions:
1. Wheelbarrow Races

2. The parrot instructor.
3. Yes, we can

4. A documentary about the colorful living
world in the pacific.

5. No, it isn’t

3. Read and choose the best programme 
for each.

1. Phong: Science: Journey to Jupiter
2. Bob: Comedy: The Parrot Instructor
3. Nga: Game show: Children are
always right.

4. Minh: Sports: Wheelbarrow Races

5. Linh: Animals: Ocean life

Activity 3: Speaking (8 minutes)
* Aims:

- SS further practice speaking skill by
talking about their favorite program
* Process:

- Allow sts about 2-3 minutes to choose
the programme they prefer and prepare for
their speaking. Encourage them to focus
on explaining why they like it.

If sts do not know the name of the

III. Speaking 
4. Work in groups:

Tell your group about your favorite TV
programme.

Consist of:

The name of the programme
The channel it is on

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

programme, they can use the Vietnamese
name. The most important thing is for
them to talk about the content of the

programme and why they like it.

Write on the board the name of each
sts’ favorite programme so that at the end
of the activity the whole class can see if
there are many sts who love the same
programme.

(T calls a representative of each group to
talk before class…)

* Conclusion:

- Alomost all the students can practice
speaking skill by completing the tasks

The season you like it.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: talk about their favorite program
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn by heart all the new words.
- Do Ex C1, 2, 3 ( workbook )
- Prepare unit 8: Skill 2

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 7: television

Period 59

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

* Knowledge: SS can listen for specific information from a recommended TV schedule
and do some tasks.

- Complete listening and writing tasks.
* Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and tick the correct channel; Listen and do True/ False exercise.
+ Writing: write a short guided passage about one’s TV- watching habits.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and learn how to relax.
*Competences: exchanging information about TV programs.
.II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute)

S1: Does exercise C1 in work book S2: writes new works.
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

- Which programme do you like best?

- Which channel do you usually watch it on?

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

- Do your parents let you watch TV every day?
3.New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening ( 15 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss can listen for specific

information from a recommended TV
schedule and do some tasks

*Process:

* Pre listening:
- Teaching vocabulary:
- Sts read the words carefully

- Give sts 2-3 minutes to read schedule
loudly.

- T checks their pronunciation. This help
them recognize the key words when they
listen to the tape

* While –listening

- Play the recording 1 time.

- Play the recording the second time and
allow ss to choose the correct answer, ss can
share their answers before listening the
recording a final time to check.

* Post- listening:

This activity is more complicated. Sts have to
listen more carefully for details.

- Sts read the sentences first.

- Plays recording again and again or sentence
by sentence carefully.

- Sts listen carefully. They can take notes
about the time for each programme and use
them as reference.

- Teacher corrects.

*Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercise.

I. Listening
Vocabulary:
- spotted:
- squirrel:

- giraffe
- inca:

1. Listen and tick the correct channel
for each programme.

Music: Green Green Summer:
Channel 1

Cartoon: The red spotted squirrel
Channel 2

Film: The lonely Giraffe Channel 3
Home and garden: How to make a dog
house Channel 2

Our heritage: The old town of Inca
Channel 3

2. Listen again and tick statements 
1-5 with T / F

1. F
2. T
3. F
4. T
5. F

Activity 2: Writing ( 15 minutes)
*Aims: To help SS to write a short guided

passage about one’s TV- watching habits.
 * Process:

- Sts read the questionnaire and choose the
most appropriate answers for him / her.
- Checks on sts’ answers

- Help them organize their ideas for writing.
- Sts can look at the suggested structure for
their writing.

*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can write an e-mai to
a friend about their Tet holiday

II. Writing

3. Write a short description of your 
TV-watching habits.

1. How many hours a day do you watch
TV?

2. How do you compare the time you
spend watching TV to the time you
spend on outdoor activities?

3. Do you watch TV when you are

eating / entertaining / reading…?
4. What kind of programme do you
watch most?

5. Do you leave your TV on when you
are not watching it?

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

- Retell the main content of the lesson: write a short guided passage about one’s TV-
watching habits.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Do exercise E1 + E2 in workbook page 15
- Prepare unit 7: Looking back + project

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016 
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án 
.

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

WEEK 22

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 7: television

Period 60

LESSON 7:

LOOKING BACK + PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit 7
then they can know the importance of TV to them.

*Skills:

+ Speaking: Make conversation to recommend an interesting TV program to friends;
Work in group to complete the exercises in Project.

+ Writing: complete the text using the words given.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and learn how to relax.
*Competences: exchanging information about TV programs..
III. Teaching process:

- Materials: Textbook,
- Equipment:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
- S1: Does exercise in workbook

- S2: write a short guided passage about one’s TV- watching habits.
2. Warm - up: (3 minute) Chatting

- Check the meaning of some words in last lessons: comedy, animals, channel,
event…….

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary (8 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to revise

vocabulary.

* Process:- Ss do activity 1,
activity 2 in vocabulary.

Sts revise the taught vocabulary
about different jobs in TV, TV
programmes and different kinds of
film by reading aloud all words in
the box, then T calls some students
to read the text and fill in with
these words. T checks if not
correct.

* Conclusion:Almost all the
students can complete the
exercises

* Vocabulary

1. Put the words in the correct columns:
- People: Newsreader, weathergirl, writer, MC
- Programme: cartoon, game show, animals,
home and garden.

- Kinds of film: documentary, romance.
2. Use the words to fill in the text below.
1. national

2. viewers

3. 7 o’clock news
4. Comedies
5. relax
6. game show
7. educational
8. writers

Activity 2: Grammar (10 minutes)
* Aims: To help SS to practice

grammar and vocabulary by
completing task 3&4

* Process:

- Ss do activity 3:

Sts look at the answers and
decide which question word is to
be used.

(Calls sts to read in chorus)
- Ss do activity 4 individually:
T calls sts to read.

* Conclusion: Almost all the
students can complete the tasks.

Grammar

3. Make suitable questions:
1. How many

2. what
3. Why
1. Who
2. When

4. Connect the sentences:

1. Ocean Life is on at 7.30 and laughing out Loud
will follow at 8.00.

2. I have watched The Seven Kitties many times
because I like the film so much.

3. BBC One is a British channel but VTV6 is
Vietnamese channel.

4. Although Along The Coast is a famous TV
series, I have never watch it.

5. I have a lot of homework tonight, so I can’t
watch Eight Feet Below.

Activity 3: Speaking (7 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to practice the

task 5.

* Process: - Sts do activity 5 in
pairs.

Sts practice if have enough time
Conclusion: Almost all the students
can complete the tasks.

III. Communication:

5. Re arrange the order of the sentences to 
have a complete conversation about a TV 
programme.

Key: A, C, B, D, F, H, G, E, I, K

6. Make conversation based on the sample in 5
Activity 4: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims: To help Ss to can talk about
the importance of TV

* Process:

Sts work in groups.

I. Project

How important is TV to you?

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Interview your friends, using the
questions below. Report your results
to the class.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students
can know how to can talk about the
importance of TV.

have to organize their activity so that they
will be able to ask questions, to take notes of
the answers, to report the results to other
people (their class)….

Finally, sts can talk about the importance of
TV).

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Ss can talk about the importance of TV
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Do exercises in work book
- Prepare next lesson.

.

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 61

LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Understand the dialogue in getting started, get some words related to the
topic “Sports and Games”, find and make conversations using the expressions

*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen to the conversation between Mai and Duong and answer the
questions; Listen and repeat the words & phrases.

+ Reading: Read the conversation and then answer the questions
+ Speaking: work in pair to ask and answer.

* Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports.
*Competences: talking about sports and games in the world.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: 
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) * Chatting:

? What do you do in your free time?
? Do you play sports?

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS
Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)

* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify
their meanings and use them to make
sentences and know what they are going to
listen.

* Process:

- Teacher use different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia, examples…..)
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Rub-out and remember.
- Copy all the words

T: lets ss listen and repeat the words in
activity 2

* Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new words and
what they are going to listen.

I. Vocabulary:

Do boxing: tập quyền anh
Do aerobics: tập e- rô- bic
Do karate: tập ka- ra- te
Play chess: chơi cờ vua

Play table tennis: chơi bóng bàn
Play volleyball: chơi bóng chuyền
Go skiing: đi trượt tuyết

Go cycling: đi đạp xe
Outdoor (adj): ngoài trời

Outdoors (adv), (n): khu vực bên ngoài
Breaktime (n): nghỉ giải lao

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)
* Aims:

- SS get the content of the conversation
between two people and the complete the
exercises.

* Process:

T: lets ss name the sports and games in
Activity 3 individually first, then compare
their answer with a parter

T: explains the difference between “ a

sport” and “a game”.

A sport: an activity that you do for
pleasure and that need physical exercise.
A game: an activty or sport with rules in
which people or team compete against
each other.

T: shows the picture in activity 1.
T: lets ss listen one time to answer the
followning questions:

? What sports can Duong do?
? Is Mai good at sports?

Ss: Duong can do karate and play table
tennis.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand the
conversation and complete the exercises.

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read
Activity 3:

1. cycling
2. table tennis

3. running
4. swimming
5. chess
6. skiing
Activity 1

a. 1. Duong can play table tennis and do
karate.

2. Mai is going to learn karate.

3. Because the equipment there is modern and
the people are friendly.

4. Duong played with Duy and won(for the
first time)

5. At the Karate club.

b. 1. Wow: used to express surprise.

2. Congratulations: used to congratulate sb/ to
tell that you are please about their success.
3. Great: use to show admiration

4. See you: used when you say goodbye.
Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and
writing skill by doing some exercises

III. Further practice
Activity 4

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

* Process:

T: asks ss to do the activity 4 in pairs
in 3 minutes

T: lets ss do activity 5 individually in
3 minutes

T: asks ss to conduct a survey (ask 2
friends to complete the survey then
report the survey and give comment
on how sporty your friend is.)

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete
the tasks.

Do: boxing, aerobics, karate

Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running, skiing
Activity 5:

1. do

2. is watching
3. goes

4. likes

5. played

Questions Answers …’s 
answe
r

…’s 
answe
r
1. Can you

swim?

A. Yes
B. No
2. Do you play

outdoors
everyday?

A. Yes
B. No
3. Do you get

up early and do

morning
exercise?

A. Yes
B. No
4. What do you

do at breaktime
at school?

A. Play in
the school
yard.
B. Sit in
the

classroom.
5. What do you

think of sports/
games?

A. very
good/
useful
A. A waste
of time.
4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Talk about sports and games in the world 5.

Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Learn new works by heart
- Read the conversation again

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 62

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Objectives:

Knowledge: Know some new words related to the topic “Sports and Games” -Learn to
pronounce the sounds /iə/ and /eə/.

Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds /iə/ and /eə/; Listen and write the
words under the pictures.

+ Writing: do matching

Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports.
Competences: talking about sports and games in the world.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: to go to the board to write new words
S2+3: read the dialogue

2.Warm - up: (3 minutes) – Ss play games “ Bingo”
T: asks ss to write 6 words about sports or games.

T: reads: tennis, table tennis, soccer, football, volleyball, running, fishing, cycling,
skiing, karate, swimming, chess, aerobics, skipping ropes, badminton…

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (15 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,
identify their meanings.

* Process:

I. Vocabulary

Sports shoes (n) Giày thể thao

Boat (n) Thuyền

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

- Teach new words: visual aids/
translation/ pictures

- T: writes new words on the board
* Checking vocab: write the words under
the picture Activity 2

T: tells ss to do the task independently
first. Calls some ss to write their answers
on the board, then check their answers as
a class.

* Conclusion: Students know new
words and complete the exercises.

Goggles (n) Kính bơi, kính bảo
hộ

Racket (n) Vợt cầu lơng

Skis (n) Ván trượt tuyết

Racquet (n) Vợt bóng bàn, tennis
2. Practice

Activity 2
1. A bicycle
2. A ball
3. Sports shoes

4. Skis

5. A boat
6. A racket
7. A skateboard
8. Goggles
Activity 3

1. c 4. e 7. b
2. d 5. g 8. f
3. a 6. H

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation (10 minutes)
* Aims:

Hepl Ss to learn and practice the sounds /eə/ and
/ɪə/

* Process:

T: explains how to form the sounds /eə/ and /ɪə/
together. Asks ss to observe teacher for the correct
pronunciation of the two sounds.

T: plays the CD 3 times and lets ss listen and
reapeat. Calls some ss to read aloud.

T: checks their answers as a class through the
game: Tasks the ss to touch their ear if they hear
/ɪə/ sound, touch their hair if they hear /eə/

sound, stay still if they don’t hear these two
sounds while teacher is saying the word aloud
* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know pronounce the
sounds: /eə/ and /ɪə/

in isolation and in context

II. Pronunciation: Sounds /eə/ and
/ɪə/

Activity 5
1. A
2. C
3. B
4. A
5. B
6. A

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims:

- Help Ss to learn the verb have for description.
* Process:

T: devides the class into 2 teams. Team 1 thinks
of the words with /eə/ sound. Team 2 thinks of
the words with /ɪə/ sound. One member of team
1 says aloud a word with /eə/ sound. *

Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand and use

*.Further- Practice

6- Listen to the sentences and 
choose the right words

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

Have for description

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds /eə/ and /ɪə/ correctly in isolation and
in context; and enrich their vocabulary related to sports items.

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises in workbook

- Prepare unit 8: Closer look 2 Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /01 / 2016 WEEK 23

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 63

LESSON 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

*Knowledge: Know the uses and form of the simple past tense; learn imperatives.
* Skills: + Speaking: work in pair, ask and answer about last weekend activities and use
imperatives to tell Sb to do Sth or to give a direct order.

+ Writing: Complete the conversations and sentences in the simple past and imperative
form.

*Attitude: To teach SS to obey the law strictly.

*Competences: talking about sports and games in the world.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: goes to the board to write new words
S2: does B1 in workbook

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) * Question and answer:
? What did you do last Sunday?

T: leads in the past simple tense.
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (15 minutes)
* Aims:

Help Ss to learn how to use the past
simple; and imperatives to tell sb to do sth
* Process:

Teaching grammar.

T: writes the teacher’s question in
warm-up stage and some Ss’answers on the

I. Grammar

1. The past simple tense
a. Examples

A: What did you do last Sunday?
B: I stayed at home. I did my
homework…….

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

board.

T: asks to look at the examples to draw

the rules, the usage, and the form.

T: reminds ss of some imperative
sentences normally used in the class.
T: lets look at the examples to draw the
usage the form.

* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss understand and use the past
simple tense fluently.

talk about a finished action in the past. We
often say when it happened.

c. Form (Textbook) Irregular verbs:
Be- was/ were

Have- had
Win- won
Eat- ate
Go- went
Do- did

d. Notes:Adverbs of time are used with the
past simple are: yesterday, 2 weeks/ 3
months… ago, last week/ month/ year/
Sunday…., in 2012/ 2011…

2. Imperatives: We use imperative to tell

someone to do something or to give a direct
order.

Eg: Sit down (please).
Open your books.

Don’t be late for school.
Activity 2: Practice (10 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss know to use and form of the
simple past tense; learn imperatives.
* Process:

- Ss work in pair to do task 2

- Feedback with reasons for their choices.
- Write activities next to each (three
activities listed in task 5).

- T models the conversation with the
class. Then ask Ss to mingle and make
arrangements with their classmates.
Feedback by asking Ss to tell the class
about their plans

* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can complete the exercises

II. Practice
Activity 1:

1. were 2. was
3. was/ did/ was 4. Did/ were/ did/ was
Activity 2:

1. was 6. had
2. didn’t do 7. did
3. sat 8. visited
4. watched 9. ate
5. went 10. scored
Activity 4:

1. Take your umbrella
2. Please don’t litter.
3. Please hurry up.
4. Don’t train too hard.
5. Put on your coat.
Activity 5:

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 64

LESSON 4 :

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: know some information about football and Olympic Games and talk
about their favorite sports and games.

*Skills:

+ Speaking: work in pair to do the quiz and interview their partner using the guided
questions; talk about their favorite sportsman or sportswoman.

*Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports.
Competences: asking and answering questions about famous sports stars.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
- Retell the way to use the simple past tense.

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes): T: shows the picture of 5 interlocked rings
? What are they?

Ss: They are 5 interlocked rings
? What do the 5 rings represent?

They represent the five major regions of the world (Africa, the America, Asia, Europe,
and Oceania)

? What are the colors?

Ss: Blue, yellow, black, green, and red.

T: explains: every national flag in the world has at least one of the five colors.
T: leads in the lesson.

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 7 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read new

words, identify their meanings and use
them to make sentences.

I. Vocabulary

Fit (adj): Khỏe mạnh

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

*Process: T uses some techniques to
present new words.

Ss read after in chorus and individually.
* Checking vocab: Rub- out and

remember.

*Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and how to use them.

Marathon (n) Chạy ma ra tong

Achieve (v) Đạt được

Achievement (n) Thành tựu

hold (v) Tổ chức

Activity 2: Speaking ( 15 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to know some information
about football and Olympic Games and
talk about their favorite sports and
games

* Process:

T: devides the class into two teams.
Each team takes turns to pick a small
piece of paper

Written down the questions in activity 1
to aswer. One score is given to one
correct answer.

T: lets ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions in Activity 2, ss
may add more questions, then calls 2
pairs to perform their interview
* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the tasks

II. Speak

Activity 1: Sports quiz

1. There are usually 22 players.(11 on each
side)

2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (devided into
two halves)

3. They are held every four years.
4. No, there weren’t Olympic Games in
2011. (They were held in 2004, 2008,
2012…..)

5. A marathon is 42.195 kilometres long( 26
miles and 385 yards).

6. They were held in the Olympia(in Ancient
Greece) (in 776 BC).

7. Boxing does.

Activity 2: In pairs, interview your

partner using the following questions. Ask
for more information.

Activity 3: Further practice ( 8 minutes)
*Aims:

Ss can talk about their favorite sportsman or
sportswoman.

*Process:

* Game: Who is he/ she?

T: Reminds ss of the homework in the
previous lesson.

Calls some ss to talk about a sportsman/
sportswoman that they like without saying
his/ her name. The whole class will guess
who he/ she is then the student who describes
will show the picture of him or her

*Conclusion:

- Almost all the students can practice
speaking skill.

III. Further practice

Activity 3: Think of a about a 
sportsman/ sportswoman you like. 
Talk about him/ her with a partner. 
Use the following cues:

- His/her name

- The sports he/ she plays

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Ss talk about their favorite sports and games.
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

- Do exercises in the workbook.
- Prepare for the next lesson

Preparation day: /01 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 65

LESSON 5 :

SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Get information about a famous footballer: Pele and talk about the
frequency they take part in sports and games.

* Skills:

+ Reading: read and answer the questions

+ Speaking: Work in pair to discuss the questions; work in group to talk about the
sports and games they do most often.

*Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports.
*Competences: asking and answering questions about famous sports stars.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: Does D2 – workbook - S2: writes new words

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) - Can you give me names of some famous football players 
in Viet Nam?

- Huynh Duc, Hong Son….
- Of whom you are his fan?
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Reading (20 minutes)
* Aims:

To help SS to Get information about a
famous footballer: Pele and talk about the
frequency they take part in sports and
games

* Process:
- Pre - reading

- Work in pairs to discuss the questions.

II. Read

1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions. 
1. Do you know Pele. The King of

Football? What is special about him?
2. Where does he come from?

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

- Encourage Ss to give their ideas.
* While -reading

- Tell Ss to read the passage quickly and
check their ideas. Allow them to read in 5
minutes.

- Ask Ss to read the passage again, then
answer the questions.

* Post - speaking:
- Let Ss talk about Pele

- Refer to other famous football players
they know and ask them who they think
the best football player they know and ask
them who they think the best football
player is.

* Conclusion

Almost all the students can get the
information and do the tasks well.

2. Read the text quickly to check your 
ideas in 1.

3. Read again and answer the questions.
Key:

1. Pele was born on 21st October 
1940.

2. People called him “ The King of
Football” because he is such a good
football player.

3. He became Football Player of the
Century in 1999.

4. He scored 1, 281 goals in total.
5. Yes, he is.

Activity 2: Speaking (10 minutes)
* Aims:

- SS practice speaking skill by talking
about the sports and games they do most
often.

* Process:

* Pre – speaking: Activity 4:

- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick
the right column.

- Refer to people in Viet Nam in general,
asking them why they usually or never
play or do this or that.

*While – speaking: Activity 5:
Let Ss work in groups asking and

answering questions. ( They should refer
to the table in 4)

Activity 6: Divide the class into groups of
4 or 5. Let them discuss their answers to
the questions. When finish, T asks one S
from each group “ What is the most
interesting thing you learnt from your
discussion?

*Post – speaking:In pairs, one S is an
interviewer and other is a famous

sportsperson. Ss role-play an interview. T
and Ss can brainstorm possible interview
questions before the activity.

* Conclusion:

- Alomost all the students can practice
speaking skill by completing the tasks

III. Speaking

Activity 4. How often do you go/do/play
these sports/games? Tick the right column.
Activity 5. Work in groups. What kind 
of sports/ games do you do most often? 
Why?

Activity 6. Work in pairs. Ask and 
answer the following questions.
1. Do you like football?

2. Do you play football or only watch it?
3. What other sports do you play?

- Do you play them well?

- When and how often do you play them?
4. Do you belong to any clubs?

5. If you don’t play sport(s), what do you
often do in your spare time?

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Learn by heart all the new words.
- Do Ex C1, 2, 3 ( workbook )

- Prepare unit 8: Skill 2 Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /01 / 2016 WEEK 24
Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 01/ 2016 6B: ……/01/ 2016 6E: …/01/ 2016

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 66

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

* Knowledge: SS can listen to get information about the sports and games people play;
Complete listening and writing tasks.

Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and do True/ False exercise; listen and complete the sentences.
+ Writing: write a paragraph about the sports and game they like.

Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports and
games to relax.

Competences: asking and answering questions about famous sports stars.
.II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute)

S1: Does exercise C1 in work book S2: writes new works.
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

- Ss play guessing game.

3.New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening ( 15 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss can listen to get information

about the sports and games people play
*Process:

* Pre listening:

- You are going to listen to the passages. Who
are they about? and about a sport/ game you
like.

* While –listening

- Listen to the passages. Who are they about?
- Play the recording once only. Ask Ss to
listen and say who the passages are about.

I. Listening

1. Listen to the passages. Who are 
they about?

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

- Listen to the passages again. Then write
True (T) or False (F) for each sentence.
- Play the recording again. While Ss listen,

they have to write down T or F

- Listen to the passages again. Fill in each
blank to complete the sentences.

* Post- listening:

- Play the recording the third time for Ss to
fill the blanks. Ss can share their answers
before listening to the recording a final time
to check.

- Plays recording again and again or sentence
by sentence carefully.

*Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercise.

1. F
2. T
3. T
4. F
5. T

3. Listen to the passages again. Fill 
in each blank to complete the 
sentences.

1. club
2. play

3. watching
4. Bill
5. goes
Activity 2: Writing ( 15 minutes)
*Aims: To help SS to write a paragraph

about the sports and game they like.
 * Process:

- Brainstorming

- Write a draft, using the cues and their own
ideas.

- Write a paragraph of about 80-120 words
about the sport/ game they like, covering as
many ideas as possible.

- Tell Ss to pay special attention to
punctuation, structural elements, linking
words…

- Give comments to the class.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can write a

paragraph about the sports and game they
like.

II. Writing

- Sport vocabulary
badminton, baseball…..

Write about a sport/ game you like. Use
your own ideas and the following as
cues.

- Name of the sport/ game
- Is it a team or an individual

sport/ game?

- How long does it last?

- How many players are there?
- Does it need any equipment

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: write a paragraph about the sports and game
they like.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

Preparation day: /0 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 0 / 2016 6B: ……/0 / 2016 6E: …/0 / 2016

UNIT 8: sports and games

Period 67

LESSON 7:

LOOKING BACK + PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit 8
then they can talk and write about a game or a sport.

Skills: + Speaking: doing the matching; talk about a game or a sport; use correct
imperatives in the situations.

+ Writing: fill in each blank with one word; complete the sentences with the correct
form of verbs.

*Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports and
games to relax.

*Competences: talking about sports and games in the world.
III. Teaching process:

- Materials: Textbook,
- Equipment:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
- S1: Does exercise in workbook

- S2: write a paragraph about the sports and game they like.
2. Warm - up: (3 minute) Ask Ss to look at the pictures

- What is the name of the sport in each picture?
- Which is your favorite sport?

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary (8 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to revise

vocabulary.

* Process Ex 1- Ss do this task
individually. T corrects their mistakes
and lets them read the words

correctly.

Ex 2- Let Ss repeat the words. Check
their pronunciation. Tell Ss to write
the answers in their notebooks. Then
* Conclusion:Almost all the students
can complete the exercises

* Vocabulary

1. Find one odd word or phrase in each line.
Key: 1. C 2.A 3. D 4. C 5. B

2. Read the four words in each line. Write

the name of the game or sport the four 
words belong to

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Activity 2: Grammar (10 minutes)
* Aims: To help SS to practice grammar

and vocabulary by completing task 3,
4&5

* Process:

Ex3: Have Ss write their answers in their
notebooks. T checks their answers.
Ex4: Ss work in pairs or groups to finish
or write the sentences. T gives

correction.

Ex5: Ss do the task individually first.
Then they can check their answers with
a partner before discussing the answers
as a class. T gives corrections. Have
some Ss read the whole passage aloud.
* Conclusion: Almost all the students
can complete the tasks.

Grammar

3. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct
form.

Key: 1. are 2. took 3. started 4. are playing
1. did you do- cycled – watched

4. What do you say in these situations?
Key:

1. Please stop making noise

2. Go out to play with your friends.
3. Don’t feed the animals

4. Stand in a line, boys!
5. Don’t tease the dog.

5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish 
the passage.

Key:

1. play 2. hear 3. games 4. sports 5.
Famous

Activity 3: Speaking (7 minutes)
*Aims: To help Ss to practice the task 5.

* Process: Ex6: Ss read the questions
and answers once or twice. Then match
them.

-Ss work in pairs and role- play the
questions and answers.

- Ss write all sentences in their
notebooks if have enough time.
* Finished!

Ask ss to complete the self-assessment.
Identify any difficulties/ weak areas and
provide further practice as needed.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the tasks.

III. Communication:

6. Match the questions in A with their 
correct answers in B.

Key: 1. a 2. e 3. b 4. c 5. d
Finished! Now you

can   

* talk about sports
and games

* talk about things
that happened in the
past

* tell someone to do
something or give an
order.

Activity 4: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims: To help Ss to can

understanding about some traditional
games in project

* Process:

- Have Ss read the passage carefully.
Explain new words and anything
difficult for Ss. Make sure they
understand everything through.
Ex2: Let Ss work in groups. Each
group chooses a game or sport. Let
them talk, then write a bout it.

* Conclusion: Almost all the students
can know how to can understanding
about some traditional games in
project

I. Project

1- Read the passage about the game “ Blind 
man bluff”

What you need: A blindfold, an open space
and 5 players or more.

1. Stand in a circle, pick one….

2. He/ She has to try and touch the others.
the other players should try….

3. When the seeker catches…

4. When the seeker guesses the other’s
name…

2- Choose one of the following sports/ games
(or one of your own) and write about it.
- Tug of war ( rope pulling)

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Ss can talk and write about a game or a sport
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Do exercises in work book
- Prepare next lesson.

.

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

UNIT 9: cities of the world

Period 68

LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Know the words about continents, countries and cities in the world.
*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen to the conversation between Mai and Tom and answer the questions;
Listen and repeat the words & phrases.

+ Reading: Read the conversation and then answer the questions
+ Speaking: work in pair to ask and answer.

* Attitude: To teach SS to love sports and encourage them to take part in sports.
*Competences: talking about sports and games in the world.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

* Brainstorming:

- Ask Ss to name some cities they know, and where they are. Ask them to locate

the cities on a map or a globe. Introduce Mai and Tom. Explain that “What nice

photos!” is an exclamation to express that you like the photos. Ask Ss what the

conversation might be about. Let Ss open their books and check their answers.

Africa Europe

America

Asia Oceania

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify
their meanings and use them to make
sentences and know what they are going to

Eg: What are Mai and Tom doing?

What are they looking at? What are the

photos of?

I. Vocabulary:

Continen

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

listen.
* Process:

Ex1: Ask Ss questions about the picture:

Ask Ss to name the cities in the photos and

ask them to support their answers. Use the

pictures to elicite the vocabulary

- Teacher use different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia, examples…..)
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Rub-out and remember.
- Copy all the words

* Conclusion:

- Almost all the students know new words and
what they are going to listen.

Exciting (Adj):

Clean (Adj):

Egg-shaped (Adj):

Times Square (N): Quảng trường Thời

Đại

Place of interest (N): Danh lam thắng

cảnh

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)
* Aims:

- SS get the content of the conversation
between two people and the complete the
exercises.

* Process:

Play the recording. Ss listen and read.

Ex2: Ss work independently. Tell them

to look at the photos and the texts

inorder to find the answers. Allow

them to share answers before

discussing as a class. Ask Ss to support

their answers.

Activity 3: Continents, countries, and

cities.

Ex3: Ss can work in pairs to complete

this task. Practise saying the continent

names with them. Ask them the

Vietnamese translations of these

names.

Ex4: Write Asia, Viet Nam, Ha Noi,

Thong Nhat Palace on the board. Ask

Ss which is the continent, which is the

country, which is the city, which is the

capital, and which is the place of

interest. Ask them to give examples for

Britain.

Then ask them to do the matching and

give feedback. Practise saying the

words with Ss. Ask them to locate the

places on a map/ globe.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand the
conversation and complete the exercises.

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

Activity 2. Read the conversation again.

Then write True (T) or False ( F).

Key:

1. F ( They are looking at photos on the

computer.)

2. F ( Tom has been to most of the

cities)

3. T

4. F ( There are modern buildings in

London as well)

5. F ( Tom has never been to

NewYork. The photo is from his

brother.)

Activity 3

Continents, countries, cities

3. Name the continents.

Key:

1. Asia

2. Europe

3. Africa

4. North America.

5. South America

6. Australia

7. Antarctica

Activity 4. Match the words in the blue

box to the names of the places.

a. Asia, Africa

b. Sweden, the USA

c. Ha Noi, Nha Trang, Amsterdam,

Liverpool

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

e. Ben Thanh Market, The Louvre

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss develop speaking and skill by
doing some exercises

* Process:

Ex5: Model game with the whole class

first. Divide Ss into 2 big groups ( eg:

left side / right side; boys/ girls). Give

Ss more questions in addition to those in

the book. Count the correct answers to

find the winning group.

Have Ss play the game in groups of

four. Remind them to record the correct

answers from each group member to

find the winner.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
tasks.

III. Further practice

Activity 5. Game: Around the world

- In group of four, choose a country and

ask your friends the questions below ( and

any others you can think of?

+ Which continent is it in?

+ What is its capital?

+ What are its major cities?

+ What is it famous for?

4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Talk about names of cities, countries. 
Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Learn new works by heart
- Read the conversation again

- Do exercises + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese
- Prepare: Unit 9: A closer look 1

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

UNIT 9: cities of the world

Period 69

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Objectives;

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: - Know some new words related to the topic “Cities of the World”: learn
superlatives of long adjectives.

- Learn to pronounce the sounds /au/ and /ai/
Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds /au/ and /ai/ correctly in isolation
and in context.

+ Writing: create a word webs.
+ Speaking: discuss the facts.

+ Reading: Read the text and check the facts.

Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and learn how to relax.
Competences: Identifying landmarks in cities around the world.
II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, extra board
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
S1: - Write new words

S2+ S3: - Read and translate the dialogue in getting started into Vietnamese.
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

Check if Ss remember which cities Mai and Tom were talking about at the
beginning of the unit. Ask them how Tom described the three cities: What did he talk
about? Which adjectives did he use? (E.g. Rio de Janeiro is exciting. It is very hot.
Sydney isn’t so hot. The beaches in Sydney are clean and beautiful. London has bad 
weather. There are also modern buildings...)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary ( 10 minutes)

*Aims: I. Vocabulary

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

opposites and create a word webs opposites in

B. some words may have more the one
opposite.

*Process: Key:

Exl:

-Ask them to match the words they know.
- Allow Ss to work together

- Point out that some adjectives in the left column
can have more than one opposite in the right
column.

- Give feedback

- Have Ss practise reading the adjectives. If there is
time, encourage them to use these words to describe
the four cities that Mai and Tom talked about.

old - new

Dangerous - safe
Quite - noisy
Dry - wet

Boring - exciting
Clean - dirty
History - modern
Cheap - expensive
Cold - hot

Ex2: 2. Create word webs.

- Have Ss work in groups. Tell them they can use
the words in 1.

- Encourage Ss to add other adjectives.

- Give feedback. Point out that some adjectives
cannot go with particular nouns (e.g. we camiot say
“long/short city” or “rainy people”).

Key:

City: beautiful, peaceful, exciting,
modern, big, polluted, safe, etc.

People: nice, friendly, unfriendly, open,
noisy, interesting, etc.

Food: delicious, awful, good, tasty, etc.
*Conclusion: - Almost all the students read new

words, know their opposites and create a word
webs.

Weather: bad, rainy, hot, cold, wet, etc.
Building: old, modem, tall, new, etc
Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation ( 7 minutes)

*Aims:

To help SS to learn and practice the sounds /au/
and /ai/ correctly in isolation and in context.
* Process:

Ex3;

- Practise the hu/ and /ai/ sounds together.

- Model the two sounds with cold and sky. Let
Ss see how the sounds are formed.

- Ask Ss to give words that have these two
sounds.

- Play the recording and ask Ss to listen and fill
in the suitable column.

- Play the recording as many time as necessary.

- Give feedback and have Ss repeat the sounds

II Pronunciation

3. Listen and write the words you hear
in the appropriate column. Then, read
the words aloud.

/ou/ /ai/
cold

snow
old
clothes

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

as a class.
Ex4:

- Have Ss practise reading the words in bold
first.

- Ask them to say if the word has an /ou/ or
an /ai/ sound.

- Play the recoding as many times as
necessary.

- Have Ss repeat the sentences. Provide further
practice by diving the class into two groups.

- Have groups read alternate lines.

If there is time, ask Ss to make sentences that
contain words with /ou/ and /ai/ sounds and practise
saying them with each other.

*Conclusion;

Almost all the students can know to pronounce the
2 sounds

4. Listen and repeat

Activity 3: Teaching grammar ( 13 minutes)

*Aims:

To help SS to learn superlatives of long adjectives.
* Process;

- Let ss have a quick look at all the pictures.

- Ask Ss to work individually to complete the
fact sheet, using one of the pictures provided.

- Have Ss work in pairs compare the answer.

- Ask them to discuss whether they agree with
each other’s answer. If they do not agree with
the answers, encourage them to give reasons.
Do not give corrective feedback at this stage.
Ex6: (7 minutes)

- Ask Ss to look at their answer (and think
about their discussions) in Exercise 5 to
check if they are similar to what the text says.

- Have Ss ask and answer questions about the
fact using most + adjectives.

- Encourage them to expand the fact sheet by
adding information like: The most famous
woman in Britain, the most well-known
novel/movie, the most famous foothaller/

III. Grammar: Superlative of
long adjectives

5. Complete the fact sheet by
choosing one picture.

Compare your fact sheet with
a classmate.

Key: 1. London

2.Oxford University

3. Shakespeare

4. fish and chips
5. tea

6. watching TV

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

actor/actress, the most popular sport, ect.

- Remind Ss of how to form the superlatives of
short adjectives. Also ask them to remember
how the comparatives of long adjectives are
formed. Write the form of the superlatives of
long adjectives on the board. Ask Ss to find
the superlatives of long adjectives in the text
in 6.

* Conclusion;

Almost all the students can use superlative of the
long adjectives correctly.

4. Practice and consolidation; (3 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: adjectives and their opposites/ the 2 sounds
/ou/ and /ai/ and superlatives of the long adjectives. ,

5.Subsequent activities: (4 minutes)

- Practice pronouncing the sounds fau/ and /ai/ and read all exercises in
pronunciation in textbook (page 28) again.

- Do exercises: A 1+ B2+ B4- page 16+ 17- workbook

- Prepare: A closer look 2 - Page 29+ 30- textbook.

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: Know the uses and form of the present perfect tense to talk about
experiences and complete the exercises.

Skills:

+ Listening: Listen to the conversation. Pay attention to the present perfect.
+ Speaking: Talk about Tom’s activities this week; ask the survey questions.
+ Writing: Complete sentences using the correct tense of verbs.

Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working.

Competences: Identifying landmarks in cities around the world.
II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures,

- Equipment: tape + cassette player
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
- SI: does B2- workbook

- S2: does AI- workbook
3. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

Game: Slap the board:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation ( io minutes)
Aims:

- Ss know how to use the present perfect

tense and past participle of some verbs.

I, Grammar
1. New words

Process: - twice (adv): hai lần

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation. - never (adv): chưa từng/ chưa bao giờ

- T: writes new words on the board.

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- ever (adv): đã từng

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.

- Ss copy the new words in their
notebooks.

- Checking: matching. 2. The present perfect

- Ask Ss to recall what Tom told Mai about
in the conversation in Getting Started.

a. Usage:

We use the present perfect to describe
our experiences.

- Ss underline all the verbs in the
present tense.

b. Form:

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

-Use the Grammar box to explain that
present perfect is, used to show that one has
had or has never had this experience.

- Provide the form of the present
perfect. Notice the past participle.
-Ask Ss to look for the original verb of the
past participles in the conversation. Notice
the use of “ever” and “never”.

-Play “Board Race” game: Write two lists of
verbs on the board. Two teams will race to
the board to write the past participles of
these verbs. Each team gets one point for the
correct participle. The team that finishes first
2 extra points. (Group 1 from “be” to “take”;
Group 2 from “clean” to “have”)

Conclusion:

Almost all the students know how to use the
present perfect tense and past participle of
some verbs.

has/ have + not + VpII + O ( ?) Has/
Have + S + VpII + O ?

Verb Past participle

Be Been

See Seen

Go Gone

Visit Visited

Take Taken

Clean Cleaned

Sing Sung

Eat Eaten

Talk Talked

Have Had

Activity 2: Practice ( 12 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to practice using the present
perfect tense by competing some exercises.

* Process:

Ex2.

- Play the entire conversation again.
Tell Ss that some information for this
exercise is not mentioned directly in
the recording-it must be inferred.

- Have Ss do the task and ask them to
support their answer with parts in the
recording.

Ex3.

- Remind Ss that the present perfect is
used to describe one’s experience,
and it is not important to state the
exact time when they happened.
Contrast this with the present simple

II. Practice

Exercise 2: Put the verbs in the
brackets into the present perfect
tense.

Key : 1.has been
2. has been
3. has visited

4. has been
5. hasn’t been

Exercise 3: Put the verbs in the
brackets in the correct form.

Key:

1 .Have you seen - have seen
2. go

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

which describes a repeated action, or
a truth, and adverbs of frequency
when something happened are often
mentioned.

- Have Ss work on this excise
individually before they compare
answer with each other. Give
feedback as a class discussion.

Ex4.

- Elicit what there is in the photos by
asking SS questions.

- Ask Ss to provide the verb past
participles.

- Have Ss write he sentences in full in

their notebooks, then in pairs take
turns talking about what Tom has
done this week.

- If time allows, have Ss talk about
what they have done this week, using
the present perfect.

Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
exercises correctly

Exercise 4: Look at Tom’s webpage.
Tell a partner what he has done this
week.

Key:

1 .He has read a book.

2. Ha has eaten “pho”.

3. Ha has played football.

4. He has got an A+.

5. He has washed his dog.

Activity 3: Production ( 8 minutes)

*Aims:

To help SS to learn superlatives of long
adjectives.

* Process:

- Have SS move around and ask different
classmates for different questions. (Ss should
not ask the Ss to report the results.

- Count the number of “Yes” answers to
each question and find out what is the thing
the most Ss have ever done, and the thing
that the least of them/ or no one has done.
*Conclusion:

Almost all the students can take part in the
activity and do it well.

III. Further practice 
Exercise 5: Class survey

Go around the class asking the survey
questions. Find out: One thing that
everyone has done

One thing no one has done.

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

- Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson: the present perfect tense to talk about

experiences

5. Subsequent activities: (4 minutes)

- Leam by heart all the new words and structures.

- Do Ex B 5,6, 7 P 17+ 18 - Workbook.

Prepare Unit 9: Communication - Page 31- Workbook.

Đã KT, ngày...tháng ....năm 2016.
Tổ trưởng:

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

Period 71

LESSON 4: COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need

Knowledge: Know the information about some landmarks in the world: Sydney
Opera House, Big Ben, Merlion, Eiffel Tower and Temple of Literature.

Skills:

+ Reading: Read the text and do True/ False exercise.
+ Speaking: Guessing game

Attitude: To teach SS to love our country and others.

Competences: Identifying landmarks in cities around the world.
II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment:
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
- SI: Does B5 (l-> 5)- workbook

- S2: Does B6 (a) - workbook -S3: Does B6 (b) - workbook
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

T shows the pictures of the five landmarks and asks them what they are. If sts do
not know their names in English, allow them to use Vietnamese. Then T gives the

English names and asks sts to match them with the photos. Elicit from sts any information
they know about the landmark: Which countries and which cities are they in? What type
of building are they? What were they built for?

Keys:

a. Merlion b. Big ben c. Temple of literature
d. Sydney Opera House e. Eiffel Tower

3. New lesson (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)
*Aims: - Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings and use them to
make sentences

Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: visual aids/
translation/ example/ pictures

- I. Vocabulary
- de'sign (v): thiết kế
- symbol (n): biểu tượng

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

- T: writes new words on the board.
- SS: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: rub out and remember
Conclusion: - Almost all the students
know new words and complete the
exercises.

- 'architect (n): kiến trúc sư

- 'Temple of 'Literature (n): Văn Miếu

Activity 2: Practice ( 17 minutes)
*Aims:

To help SS to complete the exercises.
* Process:

Ex 2:

- Ask them if they know any
UNESCO World Herritage sites in
VN.

- Have sts read the five texts about the
five landmarks. Set a time limit (2
minutes).

- Have them do the matching and ask
them to support their answer

Ex 3:

- Ask sts to read the text again and
allow them a long time limit (5
minutes). Ask them to underline key
words in each text.

- Explain that key words are important
words that help us understand the main
points of the text.

-Have sts do T/ F exercise individually,
then compare the answers with their friends
before discussing them as a class. Ask sts
to support their answer

Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know the usage
and form of the present simple tense and
the present continuous tense.

II.Practice

1.Exercise 2: Read about the
landmarks. Can you guess which
landmark from 1 they are?

Key:

1. Big Ben

2. Sydney Opera House

3. Temple of literature

4. Eiffel Tower

5. Merlion

2. Exercise 3: Write T (True) or F
(False)

Key:

1. F (The bell in the tower is the
largest bell ever made in
England).

2. F (It was designed by a Danish
architect.)

3. T

4. F ( It is the most visited
landmark in the world.)

5. T

6. F (It has a lion’s head and a
fish’s body.)

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

*Aims:

- Ss practice speaking about landmarks in
Viet Nam and in the world.

Process:
Ex 4:

- Ask sts to choose a country/ city/

landmark themselves, then ask the class to
guess what it is.

- Arrange a group of four to play the game.
Each group then chooses the most difficult
city that they had to guess in their group
and present it to the whole class a challenge

III. Further practice

Exercise 4: Think of a country, or a
landmark. Give clues. Your classmates
guess

E.g:.

A: It’s a city. It’s very hot and crowded.
B: Is it Tokyo?

A: No, it isn’t. It’s in South America.
B. The people there love football.

Conclusion: C: Is it Rio de Janeiro?

- Almost all the students can take part in
the activity.

A: Yes, it is.

4. Practice and consolidation (4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the information about some landmarks in
the world: Sydney Opera House, Big Ben, Merlion, Eiffel Tower and Temple of

Literature.

5.Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Learn new words by heart.

- Read the 5 passages again.

- Do exercises: Cl+Dl-P 18+ 19- workbook

- Prepare Unit 9: Skill 1 Page 32- textbook.

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: SS get the information from Hanh Mai’s postcard and complete some
exercises; then they can talk about the city they have just arrived.

Skills:

+ Reading: read and answer the questions/ read and match the headings with the
numbers.

+ Speaking: Talk about the city they have just arrived.
Attitude: To teach SS to love our country and others.

Competences: comparing features of cities around the world
II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, extra board.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
- S1: Writes new words

- S2: Does D1 page 19 - workbook
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

- T shows the picture and asks SS some questions:
a. What is the picture of?

b. What do you think is written on this postcard?

c. What is the purpose of writing and sending postcards while you are on holiday?
a. The photo is of Stockholm, Sweden.

b. The sender writes about his/ her stay in the city

c. We send postcards to tell our family and/ or friends that we are having a good time, but we
still miss them and want to send some photos of the place where we are so that, although they
cannot be with us there they can still see how beautiful it is.

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Reading ( 20 minutes
Aims:

To help SS to get information about
Stockholm in Sweden through a postcard
that Hanh Mai sends to her father.

Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/
examples

T : writes new words on the board.

I. Read 1. New words

- 'purpose (n): mục đích

- 'perfect (a): hoàn hảo

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

SS: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: mb out and remember.

*While-reading
Ex 2:

-Have sts look at the questions first. Ask
them to underline the key words in the
questions. Tell them these key words will
help them to find the information more
easily in the text.

- Have them read the postcard and
answer the questions individually
then compare the answer with each
other before discussing them as a
class.

- Encourage sts to support
their answer, especially
numbers 6 to 8.

Post-reading.
Ex 3:

- Have sts read the text again, this
time to match the headings.

- Call their attention to how a postcard

is organized.

Conclusion:

Almost all the students can get the
information and do the tasks well

Ex 2: Read the postcard and answer
the questions.

Key:

1. Mai is in Stockholm.

2. She is there with her family.

3. The weather has been perfect. It
is sunny.

4. Mai is staying in a hotel.

5. She has visited the Royal palace
and had “fika” in a cafe in the
Old Town.

6. “Fika” (a Swedish word)
means a leisure break when
one drinks tea/ coffee and
perhaps has some biscuits
with friends and fiimily.

7. She will cycle to discover the
city.

8. Mai is feeling happy. She
used the word such as
“fantastic”, “perfect”,
amazing”, “too beautiful for
words”

Ex 3: Read the text again and
match the headings with the
numbers.

Key:

l.i 2.c 3.h 4.b

5.d 6.g 7.f 8.e

9.a

Activity 2: Speaking ( 10 minutes )
Aims: Help Ss develop their speaking

skill by completing some tasks.
Process

Pre- speaking:
Ex4:

II.

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- Sts can choose one of the cities they
have learnt' about in this unit or
choose a city they like in Vietnam.
While- speaking:

- Work individually to answer the
questions.

Post- speaking:
Ex 5:

- Ask sts to use the notes, have them
work in pair and tell each other
about the city they choose.

- Ask SS to speak in full sentences
now. Then have them join another
pair to make groups of four and
continue their discussion.

Conclusion:

Almost all the Ss can talk about the place
they have just arrived.

When did you arrive?
Who are you with?

Where are you staying?
What have you done?

What are you doing tomorrow?
How are you feeling?

Ex 5: In pairs, use your notes to tell
your partner about your city. Then,
listen and write down notes about your
partner’s city in the space.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Teacher summarizes the lesson: information about Stockholm in
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Ask Ss to learn new words by heart.

- Do exercise D 2,3 page 19+ 20- Workbook
- Prepare: UNIT 9: Skills 2 Page 33- textbook

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: SS can listen for specific details including facts and fingers about Royal

Palace, Stockholm, Nobel Museum and SS can write a holiday postcard.

Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and do True/ False exercise; Listen and fill in the gaps.
+ Writing: Rearrange the words to make sentences; write a postcard.
Attitude: To teach SS to love countries and peace.

Competences: comparing features of cities around the world.
II. Preparations:

* Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
- SI: Write new words

- S2: Does D2- workbook page 19.
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

T shows the pictures of Sweden’s capital; Nobel museum, Old Town and Royal
Palace and ask: What do you see in the pictures?

3- New lesson: (30 minutes

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening (15 minutes)

*Aims: Help SS to listen to the tape about the

capital of Sweden and do some exercises.
Process:

Pre- listening: 4

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ examples
- T: writes new words on the board.

- SS: listen and repeat in individual first then the
whole class.

- Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again. Checking:
rub out and remember.

- T shows the pictures in warm-up again.
Ex-1:

Elicit these words from Ss: Royal palace, Nobel
prize, museum, cafes, restaurants, shops, islands.
Ask Ss if they know about Nobel and the Nobel
Prize. Ss can talk about this in Vietnamese if

I. Listening
1. New words:
- dynamic (a): sôi nổi
- ex'cept for (v): ngoại trừ

- a'ward (v/ n): thưởng/ phần thưởng

- dip'loma (n): văn bang

- 'medal (n): huân chưong

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

they do not have enough vocabulary. Tell Ss
they will listen about the Old Town in

Stockholm, and how Nobel Prizes are awarded
every year in Stockholm.

Ex 2: 2. Ex2: Listen and write T (True)/

F (False).
1. T

2. F (the oldest, not the biggest, part of
Stockholm is the Old Town.)

3.F (today, the old Town is a place with
cafes, restaurants, shops and museums.)

4. F (All Nobel Prizes, except for the
Nobel Pleace Prize, are awarded in
Stockholm.)

5. F (It is presented by the Swedish
King.)

3. Ex3: Listen again to the talk and fill in
the gaps.

1.14 2.700

3. 3000 4. 10 December
5. 10 million

- Before listening to the recording, go through
the statements with Ss

- Ask Ss to underline the most important

information in each sentence. Tell Ss they need
to listen for the main ideas they hear.

- Play the recording as many times as Ss wish.
Ex3:

- Let Ss know that this time they need to
listen for the exact details in the

recording.

- Ask them to identify the kind of

information they have to find out: years,
amount of money, number ofpeople, date,
etc.

- Play the recording for Ss to fill in the
gaps.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the tasks.

Activity 2: Writing ( 15 minutes)
Aims:

To help SS to know how to write a holiday
postcard.

Process:
Study Skills

- Write 5 Ws and 1 H on the board and ask
Ss to give examples.

- Draw their attention to the postcard in 2,
page 28 in student book. Ask Ss how the
5Ws and 1H are answered in postcard.
Have them make the question in full and
find the information from the postcard
that gives the answers.

Ex 4.

- Explain to Ss that the space for writing on
postcards is not big so people often write

II. Writing 1. Study Skills:

2. Exercise 4: Rearrange the words to
make sentences.

1. Stockholm is fantastic!

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

short sentences which contain the most
important information, and which can
express what they are feeling.

- Tell Ss that contraction is often used in

writing postcards to

make it short and informal.
Ex5.

- Ask Ss to use the notes they have made in
speaking 4, page 28 to write a postcard to
their family or friends. Remind them how
the 5 Ws and 1H are included in the notes.
If there is time, you can pair Ss and ask them to
write postcards to each other.

Have them swap and give feedback on each
other's writing once they have finished.

Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the tasks.

3. We're having a good time here

4.1love Disneyland!
5. You must come!

6.1wish you were here!

3. Exercise 5: Write a postcard. Use the
notes about the city you have chosenjn
Speaking 4, page 32

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

Ask some Ss to read aloud their Writing. Teacher and other studentsnsten and
give remarks.

Prepare: UNIT 9: Looking back + project - Page 34-35- textbook
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Learn by heart all new words.

- Dọ exercises: El-2- page 20- workbook.

- Complete the writing on the notebook.

- Prepare: UNIT 9: Looking back + project - Page 34-35- textbook.

Đã KT, ngày...tháng ....năm 2016.
Tổ trưởng:

Dear Dad,

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

Preparation day: /02 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 02/ 2016 6B: ……/02/ 2016 6E: …/02/ 2016

UNIT 9: cities of the world

Period 74

LESSON 7: LOOKING BACK AND PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

Knowledge: SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit 9
by completing the exercises then they can discuss 5 interesting facts about the city they
want to visit.

Skills:

+ Speaking: work in pair to play game: YES I HAVE; discuss 5 interesting facts
about the city they want to visit.

+ Writing: choose the best two options; complete the sentences with the correct
form of verbs..

Attitude: To teach SS to love countries and peace.

Competences: comparing features of cities around the world.
II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (Sminutes)
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes) Slap the board:

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity l: Vocabulary ( 4 minutes)
Aims: To help SS to revise vocabulary by

completing some exercises.
Process:

Ex l:

I. Vocabulary

Ex l: Choose the best two
options.

I. a/b 2. a/ c 3. a/ c 4. a/ b 5. b/ c

amazing

quiet

beautiful

delicious

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

- The aim of this task is for Ss to revise the
taught vocabulary about adjectives.

- Write the five topics: city, weather, people,
building, food on the board and elicit from Ss at
least 3 adjectives to describe each topic.

- Ask Ss if they can use the adjective “short” to
describe a city, for example, and ask why not.

-Explain “short” is used for distance or length,
but not to describe a city.

-Give Ss sufficient time to do the exercise.
Conclusion:

Almost all the students can complete the
exercises

Activity 2: Grammar ( 12 minutes)
Aims: To help SS to practice grammar by

completing exercises
Process:

Ex 2:

- Ask Ss to complete the conversation
individually. They can share answers with a
partner, but they should record their original
answers to guide their self-assessment.
Ex3:

- Go through the questions with Ss. If they do
not have any information about a particular
question, stop and give at least 3 answer options
for them to consider.

-After they have completed the fact sheet, have
a whole class discussion about the answers. The
aim of the task is to practise the superlative, so
accept reasonable answers, as there could be
several correct answers.

Ex 4:

-Tell Ss for a reference they can look at the text
about Britain on page 25 in Student’s Book.
(Homework)

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercises.

II. Grammar

Ex 2: Put the verbs in the brackets into

the present perfect.

Key:

l .Have you ever eaten 2.Have you
been

3.have been 4.havebeen

5.Have you visited 6.have seen
Ex 3: In pairs, complete this fact sheet 
about Viet Nam.

Key: (suggested)

*Biggest city: Ho Chi Minh City

*Oldest university: Quoc Tu Giam, Thang
Long -HaNoi (1076)

*Most popular Vietnamese writer: Nguyen
Du, Nam Cao

*Most popular food: spring rolls (nem),
noodles (pho)

</div>
(175)<div class='page_container' data-page=175>

Activity 3: Communication (4 minutes)
Aims: To help SS to practice speaking Process:

-Try the first “Have you ever ...?” question on

page 26 in Student’s book with two students as
an example.

-Ask the class who they think told the truth, who
did not, and why they think so.

-Have Ss play the game in pairs. Ask them to
add original “Have you ever ...?” questions if
they wish. If time allows, ask some pairs to
report what they have found out about their
partner. Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercises.

III. Communication.
Ex 5: Game: Yes, I have

In pairs, ask a Have you ever question.
A: Have you ever been on TV?

B: Yes.

A: When was that?
B: Last year.

A: Which program were you in?
B: ... the Evening News.

Activity 4: Production ( 10 minutes)
Aims: To help SS to know more about cities in

the world and in Viet Nam and their interesting
facts.

Process:

My 5 Day Journey Around the World

- Show the pictures of some places of interest
in Viet Nam and in the world on the screen.
Together with Ss, choose famous city in the
world or a city in Viet Nam and find five
interesting facts about the city as an example.
-Discuss how Ss can make the poster look
attractive (include photos, drawings, different
layout/styles when writing the facts, ect.)

- Work in group to complete the project with a
short presentation. -Ask Ss to position the cities
on a map of the world/a globe if available, and
give the reasons for choosing the cities.

-Display the posters around the classroom. If
short of time, Ss can do the project as

homework.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the task.

IV. Project

My 5 Day Journey Around the World
Choose five cities in the world that you
want to visit. Find 5 interesting facts about
each city.

Design a poster. Make sure to include the
facts about the cities and some pictures.

</div>
(176)<div class='page_container' data-page=176>

- Retell the main content of the lesson: adjectives/ the present perfect tense/ facts
in Viet Nam and in the world.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Redo all the exercises above and do exercises E3 page 21- workbook.
- Do exercise 4/ page 34- textbook.

- Prepare: Review 3- Page 36-37- textbook

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 0 / 2016 6B: ……/0 / 2016 6E: …/0 / 2016

Period 75

Review 3

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

*Knowledge: SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in

unit 7, 8 & 9 by completing the exercises in part 1: LAUNGUAGE

*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and do odd one out exercise.

+ Writing: complete all exercises of vocabulary and grammar.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working.

*Competences: completing all exercises by using vocabulary and grammar in

unit 7&8.

II. Preparations

- Materials: - A list of grammar and structures from unit 7 to unit 9

- Some ex and their keys

- Equipment: Extra boards

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: during the lesson

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

? What is the strangest sports or games that you know?

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

</div>
(177)<div class='page_container' data-page=177>

vocabulary, main grammar, vocabulary and

everyday English they’ve learnt from Unit

7-9.

Process:

- Show the pictures in activity 1 and ask if

ss know those sports:

? Which sports is it?

? How can we do it?

- Ss free answer before reading the texts to

have the correct ones.

- Ss do Activity 1, 2 individually, and check

it with their peers. T lets Ss dicuss among

themselves before finalizing the answers.

- Pass Ss the worksheets and instruct Ss to

carry out the survey (Activity 3)

- Call 2 Ss to report their survey

- Let Ss look through the dialouge (Activity

4) to guess the missing words.

- Play the recording 2 times. Ss listen and

fill in the blank

- Allow Ss read the questions in activity 5 to

decide what information they should listen

for specific

- Play the recording 2 times. Ss listen and

answer the questions

- Play the recording the last time pause at

the information to answer the questions to

let ss check their answer

* Conclusion:

- Ss can remember and understand the use

of these structures

1. Pronunciation

Activity 1

1. B 2. A 3.A 4. B

5.D 6. D

Activity 2

1. Who’s faster

2. Putting your toes together

3. Who’s faster

4. Putting your toes together

II. Vocabulary:

Activity 3:

1. C 2. B 3. A 4. A

5. C

Activity 4:

1. Paris 2. Foodball

3.local televisions 4. Country

5.remote control 6. Summer

sports

III. Grammar:

Activity 5:

1.started 2. Play 3. Had

4. Is

5. bought 6. Has worked

Activity 6:

1. Which 2. When 3.

Which

4.How 5. Where

Activity 7:

1.the most expensive

2.the most popular

3. The most interesting

4.the most colourful

5. the most relaxing

Activity 8:

2 – a, 4- b, 5 – c, 6 – d, 1 – e

Activity 2: SKILL (10’)

Aims: Help Ss to the exercises

Process:

- Let Ss look through the dialouge

(Activity 4) to guess the missing words.

- Play the recording 2 times. Ss listen and

fill in the blank

- Allow Ss read the questions in activity 5

to decide what information they should

listen for specific

I. Speaking

Activity 3

II. Listening

Activity 4

1. competition 2. skiing

3. country

4. Canada 5. cartoon

Activity 5

</div>
(178)<div class='page_container' data-page=178>

- Play the recording 2 times. Ss listen and

answer the questions

- Play the recording the last time pause at

the information to answer the questions to

let ss check their answer

- Ask ss to read the table and decide what

tense/ structure to use for the writing and

how the information is organised.

Encourage ss to change some delails if

they can

Conclusion:

- Ss do these exercises well

2. Thailand

3. Wait and See

III. Writing

Activity 6

Last summer, Tim and Mark visited

India. They...

4. Practice and consolidation:

(3 minutes)

- Correct the ex. If necessary

5. Subsequent activities:

(2 minutes)

- Prepare : Written test 3

- Do exercise 8, 9 in textbook

Preparation day: / / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2016 6B: ……/ / 2016 6E: ……/ / 2016

Period 76

written test 3

I. Objectives:

*Knowledge: To test SS’ knowledge about pronunciation, grammar and

vocabulary, reading and writing skills from unit 7 to 9.

*Skills: reading, listening, writing

*Attitude: Teach Ss to be honest

*Competences: taking exam with good result.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Lesson plan, textbook

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm - up:

3. New leson:

MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 3

CONTENT

TEST 3
UNIT: 7,8,9.

Knowledge understanding application total

(%)
Lower level High level

TN TL TN TL TN TL TN TL TN TL

Part 1

Listenin

g

- Listen and tick. (5

sentences)

- Listen and write T

(True) or F (False)

0,254c

5c
0,2

4c
 1
10%

5c
 1
10%

Part 2

Use of

English

*Phonetics

-Choose the word

that has

pronunciation

4c

0,25 4c

</div>
(179)<div class='page_container' data-page=179>

differently from the

others.

*Grammar:

+ Comparative

Adjectives,adverbs

+ wh-question

+ connective words :

*Vocabulary:

-

Words describing

sport

-Words describing

the weather

-Words of TV

programmes

(MCQ:8)

10c
 0,2
4c
0,25
4c
0,25
 
4c
1
10%
10c
 2
20%
4c
1
10%

Part 3

Reading

-Complete the letter

using the words in

the box

-Read the passage

and answer the

questions .

(4 questions)

4c
0,25
5c
1
10%

Part 4

Writing

-Rewrite the sentences
without changing the
meaning.

-Write a short paragraph ,
using the following
questions to help your
writing.
4c
0,5 4c
2
20%

Tổng số

câu

Tổng số

điểm

Tỉ lệ

phần

trăm

44c
10
100%
18c
4
40%
4c
1
10%
4c
1
10%
9c
2
20%
5c
1
10%
4c
1
10%
32c
5
50%
18c
5
50%

: ………Name :
………..
. Class 6

Mark comment

THE THIRD TEST - ENGLISH 6 (MODEL)- TIME :45 MINUTES

A.LISTENING: (2pts)

I.>

Listen and tick the correct channel for each programme (1pt)

PROGRAMME CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3

</div>
(180)<div class='page_container' data-page=180>

Cartoon : The Red Spotted Squirrel 
Film :The Lonely Giraffe

Home and Garden:How to Make a Dog 
House

Our World ; The Old Town of Inca

II.> Listen and write T (True) or F (False) (1 pt)

Statements T F

1. Hai plays chess every Saturday
2. Angry Birds is Bill's favorite game.
3. Alice doesn't like doing sport very much.

4. Trung is very good at playing football.
 B. USE OF ENGLISH

I/ Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part (1pt)
1. A. further B. another C. leather D. author
2 A. favourite B. slight C. fine D. high

3. A. here B. fear C. pair D. idea
4. A. cave B. famous C. late D. channel
 II/Choose the best answer by circling A, B, C or D: (2pts)

1. My father likes watching TV _________ my mother likes going shopping

A. and B. but C. or D. so

2. I want to work in television industry,...I am working hard

A. because B. although C. so D. and

3. They cancelled their picnic ...the weather was bad

A. because B. when C. but D. or
4. ...the programme is late, we will wait to watch it.

A. Because B. Although C. When D. So

5. Which girl is _________, Mary or Daisy?

A. intelligent B. more intelligent C. the intelligentest D. most
intelligent

6. Football is an ...game.

A. outdoor B. indoor C.individual D. fun
7, Mai likes ...weather because she can go swimming

A.hot B.cold C.rainy D.windy
8, ...do you go to the gym ? By bus

A.What B.Where C. Why D.How

9. She _______ to me yesterday.

A. writes

B. write

C. wrote

D. has

written

10. This hat is the ………… of all

A. expensivest B. more expensive C.cheapest D. cheaper

III. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct forms.

(1pt)

1. Mary often (do) __________ exercise every morning.

2. He (pass) __________ the exams last year.

3. She (not / finish) ________ her homework yet.

4. You ever (eat) ________ sea food?

</div>
(181)<div class='page_container' data-page=181>

1. How long does she read the book? _ For two days.

A

B

C D

2. Does she often phones you in the evening?

A B C D

3. I didn’t took part in the party last night.

A B C D

4. Does Mai and Hoa usually go to the English club?

A B C D

C. READING

II.> Read the text and answer the questions: (1pt)

Nam likes sports very much .He jogs in the park every morning .In the afternoon ,he
often plays soccer with some friends .They often play it in the stadium near Nam's
house .They never play soccer in the street .On the weekend ,he and his friends
sometimes go camping in the mountains.They always take food and water
.Sometimes ,they camp overnight .

1,Does Nam like sports ?

→………...
2,How often dóes he jog ?

→………...
3,What does he often do in the afternoon ?

→………...
4,Who does he usually play soccer with ?

→………...
D.WRITING (2 pts)

1. Rewrite the sentences without changing the meaning. (2 pt).
1. My sister can run very fast.

→ My sister is ………..
2.Mai is a bad swimmer.

→ Mai swims………..………
3.No house in the street is older than this house.

→This house………
4.Lan is the most beautiful in my class .

→No one in my class is………

4. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- T hands in the papers and gives remarks.

5. Intended test and evaluation: (1 minutes)

</div>
(182)<div class='page_container' data-page=182>

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 77

LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Understand the dialogue in getting started and know the words about
types of houses in the future.

*Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation between Phong and Nick
+ Reading: Read the conversation and complete the table and sentences.
+ Speaking: work in pair ask and answer questions about the pictures.
Attitude: To teach SS to love their home.

Competences: predicting what houses will be like in the future.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: 
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)Net-work.

Living room
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words, identify
their meanings and use them to make
sentences and know what they are going to

I. Vocabulary:

UFO (n): Unidentified Flying Object:
đĩa bay hoặc vật thể bay không xác định
surround (v): bao quanh

</div>
(183)<div class='page_container' data-page=183>

listen.

* Process:- Teacher use different techniques
to teach vocab (situation, realia,

examples…..)

* Checking vocab: Rub-out and remember.
* Conclusion:- Almost all the students know
new words and what they are going to listen.

solar energy (n): năng lượng mặt trời
wireless (aj) vô tuyến điện, không
dây

Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)
* Aims:- SS get the content of the

conversation between two people and
the complete the exercises.

* Process:

Let Ss say something about the
houses they are living in and in the
future they have got.

T sets the context for the listening text
and asks Ss some questions about the
picture.

Play the recording.
Ss listen and read.

Ss work in pairs and practice saying
the answers together.

T asks Ss to read the words, look at
the pictures and match them together.
T asks Ss to write the adjectives that
can be used to describe the pictures.
Ss write the answers on the board.
Ss do the role play.

Let Ss tick where they want their
houses to be located and tell the group
about them.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can
understand the conversation and
complete the exercises.

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

a. Complete the table.

Type of house: UFO

Location: in the mountains
Surroundings: many tall old trees
Number of rooms: 20

Appliances in the

room: a wireless TV

b. Read the conversation again. Complete the
sentences.

1. mountains.

2. many tall old trees.
3. twenty.

4. a wireless TV.

2. Match the words with the pictures.

Key:

1.c 2.a 3.e 4.b 5.d

3.a. Work with a partner. What adjectives 
can you think of to describe the houses in 
( big, tall, nice, beautiful, large, comfortable…)
b. Ask and answer the questions about the 
picture.

Eg: A: Which house do you like best?
B: I like the palace.

A: Why?
B: It’s big!

4. Tick the place where you want your future 
house to be located and write sentences.. 
 In the countryside

In the city

In the mountains
In space ……
Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims: - Help Ss develop speaking

and writing skill by doing some
exercises

III. Further practice
5. Game:

</div>
(184)<div class='page_container' data-page=184>

* Process: Game: “ Outside my
window”

Ss work in groups

T explains how the game is played.
 * Conclusion:Almost all the students
can complete the tasks.

water. I can see children playing. Where is my
house?

B: It’s by the sea.
A: Correct!
4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: talk about different houses in the future.
Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Learn new works by heart. - Read the conversation again

- Do exercises + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese

- Prepare: Unit 10: A closer look 1 Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016

Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 78

LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Objectives:

*Knowledge: - Know some new words related to the topic “our houses in the

future”: learn superlatives of long adjectives; learn to pronounce the sounds /dr/

and / tr/

*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and put the words into the correct columns; Listen and repeat

the words and sounds /dr/ and / tr/ correctly in isolation and in context.

+ Writing: match appliances in A with things they can or might do in B.

+ Speaking: work in pair to ask and answer questions about appliances.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their home.

*Competences: predicting what houses will be like in the future.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.

- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: to go to the board to write new words
S2+3: read the dialogue

2.Warm - up: (3 minutes) Chatting with students.
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (15 minutes)
* Aims:

- Ss know how to read new words,
identify their meanings.

* Process:

Ss work in pairs.

Ss work individually.

I. Vocabulary

</div>
(185)<div class='page_container' data-page=185>

T calls some Ss to write the

sentences on the board.

T asks Ss to read the example first.

Tell them to role-play the

conversation.

T plays the recording twice.

Ss listen and repeat the chants

sentence by sentence.

* Conclusion: Students know new
words and complete the exercises.

drop (n, v) giọt, rơi, thả dù

drip (n,v) sự chảy nhỏ giọt, chảy nhỏ giọt

cottage (n) nhà tranh

2. Practice

1. Listen and repeat the appliances in

the box then put them in the

appropriate columns.

Living room: wireless TV.

Bedroom: wireless TV, hi-tech robot.

Kitchen: modern fridge, automatic

dishwasher.

Bathroom: automatic washing machine.

2. Match the appliances in A with the

things they can or might do in B.

Key:

1.c 2.d 3.b 4.e 5.a

3. Ask and answer the questions about

appliances in the house.

Eg: A: What does a wireless TV do?

B: It helps us watch TV programmes

from space.

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation (10 minutes)
* Aims:

Hepl Ss to learn and practice the sounds /dr/

and / tr/

* Process:

T models sounds /dr/ and /tr/ first

Sts practice then together

Plays the recording and Ss have to listen

and repeat. Then Ss put the words in the

correct column. They can compare their

answers before T checks.

T plays the recording.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can know pronounce the
sounds: /dr/ and / tr/ in isolation and in context

II. Pronunciation: Sounds

/dr/

and / tr/

4. Listen and repeat the sounds:

/dr/ and /tr/

Key:

/dr/: drive, drops, drip, dripping

/tr/: countryside, travel, train,

tractor, track

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims:

- Help Ss to learn the verb have for
description.

* Process:

T asks Ss to find more words with the

sounds / dr/ and /tr/.

. * Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand and

use Have for description

III.Further- Practice

5. Say the words you have written

in the table. Pay attention to the

sounds.

Ss can add more words if

possible.

</div>
(186)<div class='page_container' data-page=186>

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds /dr/ and / tr/ correctly in isolation
and in context; and enrich their vocabulary related to sports items.

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises in workbook

- Prepare unit 10: Closer look 2

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 79

LESSON 3: A CLOSER LOOK 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students will be able to:

* Knowledge: Know the uses and form of the simple future tense with WILL for the
future and MIGHT for future possibility and complete the exercises.

*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and do True/ False exercise.

+ Speaking: work in pair to talk about the appliances in the future.
+ Writing: Complete sentences and do the matching.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their home.
*Competences: predicting what houses will be like in the future.
II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minute) 
S1: goes to the board to write new words
2: does B1 in workbook

2. Warm - up: (3 minutes) Chain game:

T gives a word on the board and Ss have to make another word with the ending letter.
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (10 minutes)
* Aims:

Help Ss to learn how to use and form of
the simple future tense with WILL for the
future and MIGHT for future possibility
and complete the exercises

* Process:

T gives some actions which are likely to
happen in the future.

II. Grammar
1. Structure.

Eg: I will travel to the Moon by super car in
the future.

+ Affirmative:

S + will + V(infinitive) + object.
- Negative:

</div>
(187)<div class='page_container' data-page=187>

* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss understand and use the
simple future tense with WILL for the

future and MIGHT for future possibility
fluently.

? Question form:
Will + S + V(inf) + O?
Note: (will not = won’t)

The use: We use Will to talk about actions
we think are likely to happen in the future.
Activity 2: Practice (15 minutes)

* Aims:

- Help Ss know more about simple future
tense with WILL for the future and
MIGHT for future possibility fluently
* Process:

Ss read the dialogue in pairs first. Then
ask them to do the task individually.

T observes and helps when necessary.
(corrects Ss’pronunciation & verb forms)

T allows Ss to match the verbs in A with
the appropriate nouns in B.

Ss work in pairs. T lets Ss think about if
the appliances in A will or won’t do the
things in B in the future.

T plays the recording and asks Ss to read
the poem, focusing on the rhythm and
intonation.

Ss can work independently to complete
the task.

* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can complete the exercises

II. Practice

1. Complete the conversation with “will 
or won’t”.

Key: 
1. will
2. won’t
3. will
4. will
5. will
6. will
7. will
8. won’t
9. will
10. won’t

2. Match the verbs in A with the nouns in

B.

Key:

1.d 2.f 3.a 4. g 5.b 6.h
7.e 8.c

3. Grammar:

Might for future possibility.

Weuse “Might” to talk about actions that
are possible in the future. (We are not sure
if they will happen or not)

Eg: We might have robots do our
housework.

4. Listen and read the two poems. Then 
decide whether the statements below are T 
or F.

1.T
2.T
3.F
4.F
5.T
6.F

Activity 3: Prodution(5 minutes)

* Aims: - Help Ss know uses and form of

simple future tense with WILL for the
future and MIGHT for future possibility.
* Process: Have Ss study the example
first.

Then asks them to think what they might
do or have in the future.

Ss work in pairs.

III. Production:

5. Think about what you might do or have 
in the future. Share your ideas with your 
classmates:

</div>
(188)<div class='page_container' data-page=188>

/ or no has done.
* Conclusion:

Almost all Ss can complete the exercises

internet.
4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: The present continuous to talk about future
plans and arrangements, suggestion

5. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Prepare unit 10: Communication

Preparation day: / / 2015

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ / 2015 6B: ……/ / 2015 6E: ……/ / 2015

Period 80:

TEST CORRECTION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: know the mistakes they’ve made in the test and correct their mistakes.
Skills: reading, writing,.

*Attitude: Realize their mistakes and need to learn more carefully.
*Competences: know their good and weak points in each skill.
II. Preparations:

- Materials: Lesson plan, test paper.
- Equipments: stereo, tape English 6.
III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

2. Warm-up: (5 minutes) Play bingo (Kinds of clothing)
3. New lesson: (35 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Giving remarks (5 minutes)
Aims: Help SS to know the result of the whole

class and know their main weakness that they
need to overcome. . Process:

-T: gives the remarks of the whole class and
compares with the other class in the same grade.

-T: gives out the test paper to SS Conclusion:
All SS can know the result of the other class as
well as theirs.

Advantages:

- Some Ss have good knowledge and know
the ways to do the test well.

-The letters are written clearly, the tests are
well- organized. Limits:

- Some Ss are too lazy, do not get enough
the main new words and grammar.

The letters are too bad to read.
Activity 2: Listen (5 minutes)

Aims: To help SS to know

their results of listening and
help them to correct their
incorrect answer.

Process:

- T plays the tape twice and
asks SS to correct their

I.>Listen and tick the correct channel for each programme 
(1pt ) (phần nghe skill 2 -listening 1 -unit 7 8)

Programme Channel

1

Channel
2

Channel
3

Music :Green Green

Summer √

</div>
(189)<div class='page_container' data-page=189>

wrong answer.

- T gives compliments to
the excellent students and

points out the limits of
some weak Ss.

Conclusion: Almost all the
students can understand
their good and weak points

Squirrel

Film :The Lonely Giraffe √

Home and Garden : How to

Make a Dog House √

Our Heritage ; The Old 
Town of Inca

√
II.> Listen and write T (True) or F (False) (1 pt)(phần nghe 
skill 2 -listening 1 -unit 8. 15 )

Statements T F

1. Hai plays chess every Saturday √
2. Angry Birds is Bill's favorite game. √
3. Alice doesn't like doing sport very

much. √

4. Trung is very good at playing football. √
Activity 2: Check vocabulary / structures (10 minutes)

Aims: To help SS to know their
results of vocabulary and
structures and help them to
correct their incorrect answer.
Process:

- Ask SS to go to the board to
give the answer.

- T: explains if necessary.

Conclusion: Almost all the
students can understand their
good and weak points.

B. USE OF ENGLISH

I/ Find the word which has a different sound in the 
underlined part (1pt)

1 D 2. A 3. C 4. B

II/Choose the best answer by circling A, B, C or D: 
(2pts)

1B…… 2C…… 3A…… 4B…… 5B………
6A……… 7A...8.D...

III. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct forms. (1pt)
1.does 2.passed 3. Hasn’t finished

4. Have you ever eaten

IV.Find out the mistake from the underlined word
1.B. has she read 2. B. phone 3. Take 4. A. do
II.> Read the text and answer the questions: (1pt)
1→Yes, he does.

2→ He jogs in the park every morning
3→ In the afternoon ,he often plays soccer
4→ with some friends..

Activity 3; Check writing (10 minuutes)
Aims: To help SS to know their results of

writing and help them to correct their incorrect
answer. Process:

-Ask 2 SS to go to the board to give the
answer.

T: explains if necessary.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
understand their good and weak points

1. Rewrite the sentences without changing

the meaning. (2 pt).

1. → My sister is a very fast runner
2.→ Mai swims badly

3.→This house is the oldest in the street
4.→No one in my class is more beautiful
Activity 4: Check reading (5 minutes)

Aims: To help SS to know their results of
reading and help them to correct their incorrect
answer. Process:

-Ask 2 SS to go to the board to give the
answer.

I.> Read the text and answer the 
questions: (1pts)

</div>
(190)<div class='page_container' data-page=190>

-T: explains if necessary.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
understand their good and weak points.

4. with some friends.
5. food and water
4. Practice and consolidation: (3 minutes)

- Teacher reminds Ss to study harder, more carefully.
5. Subsequent activities (2 minutes)

- Prepare the new lesson:"Unit 10: Getting started.

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 81

LESSON 4:

COMMUNICATION

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need

*Knowledge: SS will able to talk about houses in the future: types, surroundings,

locations, room, appliances.

*Skills:

+ Speaking: work in group, in pair and in individual to talk about houses in the

future.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their home.

*Competences: expressing preferences about types of houses and appliances in

the future.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures.

- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation:

(5 minute)

- Retell the future tense

2. Warm - up:

(3 minutes)

Play a game: Things we might do in the future.

T writes the following phrases on six small pieces of paper. Then explains how

the game is played.

Place six pieces of paper face down. Take turns looking at a piece of paper. Read

the phrase on it. Find the appropriate phrase on the circle below. Make sentences

about the future using “won’t or might”

Correct sentence + 1

Incorrect sentence -1

3. New lesson:

(30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

</div>
(191)<div class='page_container' data-page=191>

words, identify their meanings.

* Process T uses some techniques to

present new words.

Ss read after in chorus and individually.

* Checking vocabulary: make sentences

with them.

* Conclusion: - Almost all the students

know new words and how to use them.

planet (n) hành tinh

cinema (n) = movie theater

a lot = much = plentiful nhiều

Activity 2: Practice (20 minutes)

* Aims: Ss can talk about houses in

the future

* Process:

T asks Ss to answer the questions by

ticking ‘Yes’ or ‘No’

It depends on Ss’ ideas.

Ss do the role-play in pairs.

* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can do the

tasks.

II. Practice

2. Class survey: HOME IN THE

FUTURE.

a. Read the questions below. Tick

‘Yes’ or ‘No’

Key: (suggestion answers)

1. Yes

2. No

3. Yes

4. No

5. Yes

6. Yes

b. Use the questions in a to interview

your partner.

Eg:

You: Hi, Nam. Will you live in a hi-tech

house in the future?

Nam: Yes, I will.

You: Will your house in space?

Nam: oh, no. It won’t.

You: So where will it be?

Nam: I’m not sure. It might be by the

sea

Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)

*Aims:

- Ss practice talking about houses in the

future.

Process: T asks Ss to read the example

to understand how to tell the class about

the interview in b. Let some Ss tell the

class about their interviews, using the

main information in b.

*Consolidation: - Almost all the

students can take part in the activity.

III. Further practice

</div>
(192)<div class='page_container' data-page=192>

4. Practice and consolidation:

(4 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: talk about houses in the future.

5. Subsequent activities:

(3 minutes)

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do exercises: C1, C2

- Prepare unit 10: Skill 1

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 82

LESSON 5:

SKILL 1

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: SS can understand the content of the text: houses in the future and future
appliances; and talk about their houses in the future.

* Skills:

+ Reading: read and answer the questions/ read and do the matching.
+ Speaking: Talk about the houses and appliances in the future.
*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their home.

*Competences: expressing preferences about types of houses and appliances in the
future.

II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, extra board.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
- S1: Writes new words

- S2: Does D1 in workbook
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

T asks Ss to look at the pictures and ask them some questions.
- What type of house do you think it is? - It’s a villa.
- Where do you think the house is? - On the ocean.

- What can you see around the house? - a helicopter, trees, a garden, a swimming pool,
…

- What can you see in the house? - Robots in the kitchen, a TV, a computer, a hi-fi
stereo, …in the living room.

3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Reading ( 15 minutes)
Aims:

To help SS to get information about houses
in the future and future appliances.

Process:

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/

I. Read 1. New words

</div>
(193)<div class='page_container' data-page=193>

examples

T : writes new words on the board.
SS: listen and repeat in individual first
then the whole class.

-Call 3- 4 SS to read the words again.
Checking: mb out and remember.
*While-reading

Ask Ss to read the text quickly and check
their ideas.

Ss work in pairs.
T gives the feedback.

T asks Ss to scan the passage again and
find the information to complete the

questions.

Ss can compare answers before discussing
them as class.

T gives the key and Ss check.
Ss work in pairs and follow the
instructions.

Post-reading.

Ss can compare answers before discussing
them as class.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
get the information and do the tasks well

- contact sb (v) liên hệ , liên lạc với ai
Exercise 2. Read for the main

information.

3. Read the text and match the phrases 
in A with the correct ones in B.

1. a, e,c,h
2. b,d,f,g

4. Read the passage again and answer 
the questions.

1. On the ocean.

2. There will be a swimming pool in front
and a large flower garden behind the
house.

3. No.

4. They will do the housework (clean the
floors, cook meals, wash clothes, water
the flowers and feed the dogs and cats.)

Activity 2: Speaking ( 10 minutes )
Aims: Help Ss talk about their houses in

the future.

Process: Once Ss have drawn their
furniture house, let them read example and
do the task.

Conclusion: Almost all the Ss can talk
about the place they have just arrived.

III.Speaking:

Exercise 5. On a piece of paper, draw 
your future house. Describe your house
to your partner. Your partner will

draw the house you describe. 
Example:

A: My house will be on the Moon. It will
be large and comfortable.

Activity 3: Production ( 10 minutes )
Aims: Help Ss talk about their houses in

the future.

Process: Have Ss work in groups.
Allow Ss time to draw the appliances in
their future rooms/ houses.

When they finish, ask some Ss to speak in
front of the class.

Conclusion: Almost all the Ss can talk
about the place they have just arrived.

IV. Further practice:

6. Draw the appliances in your future 
bedroom then talk about them to the 
group.

Example:

I will have a smart phone to talk to my

friends on other planets.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

- Teacher summarizes the lesson: information about Stockholm in
5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

</div>
(194)<div class='page_container' data-page=194>

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 83

LESSON 6:

SKILL 2

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: SS can listen to the conversation between Nick and Linda and get
information about dream houses.

*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen and tick the columns; listen and choose the dream houses.
+ Writing: write about a dream house.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their home.

*Competences: expressing preferences about types of houses and appliances in the
future.

II. Preparations:

* Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: (5 minutes)
- SI: Write new words

- S2: Does D2- workbook
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

T invites two groups of 5 students to take part in the game and gives some rules of the
game.

Chain game:

Eg: houseggood……..
3- New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening (15 minutes)
Aims: Help SS to listen to the tape about

the capital of Sweden and do some
exercises.

Process:

T presents some new words.

T asks Ss to make sentences with the new
words.

* Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/

I. Listening
1. New words:

view (n) cảnh

cable TV (n) truyền hình cáp
locate (v) đặt ở

coast (n) bờ biển

1. Look at the pictures and give the 
details.

</div>
(195)<div class='page_container' data-page=195>

examples

Listen to Nick and Linda talking about
their dream houses. Which house would
each prefer?

T plays the recording.

Ss look at the information in the first
column, listen and tick.

T corrects the mistakes where necessary.
Conclusion: Almost all the students can

complete the tasks.

swimming pool and a flower garden.)
Nick: Picture 2 (apartment in the city)
1. Listen to the conversation again.

What is important to Nick? What is
important to Linda? Tick the
columns.

Key:

1. park view
2. city view
3. sea view

4. swimming pool
5. garden

6. cable TV

7. quiet
Activity 2: Writing ( 15 minutes)

Aims:

To help SS to know how to write a
holiday postcard.

Process: Ss discuss their dream houses,
using the suggested ideas.

Ss work in pairs.

1. What type of house it is.
2. Where it is located
3. What it looks like
4. What surrounds it
5. What appliances it has

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the tasks.

II. Writing

3. Discuss the following ideas about 
your dream house.

Ss give the answers.

4. Now fill in the table about your 
dream house.

5. Write a paragraph about your

dream house.

- type of house
- location

- number of rooms
- surroundings

- things in the house and what they will/
might do for you.

4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

Ask some Ss to read aloud their Writing. Teacher and other students listen and give
remarks.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)
- Learn by heart all new words.

-Do exercises: El-2- workbook.

-Complete the writing on the notebook.

-Prepare: UNIT 10: Looking back + project

Thọ Sơn, ngày tháng năm 2016
 Tổ trưởng kí duyệt giáo án

Đào Thị Thúy Anh

Linda Nick



</div>
(196)<div class='page_container' data-page=196></div>
(197)<div class='page_container' data-page=197>

Preparation day: /03 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 03/ 2016 6B: ……/03/ 2016 6E: …/03/ 2016

UNIT 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE

Period 84

LESSON 7:

LOOKING BACK AND PROJECT

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit
10 by completing the exercises then they can make a poster for their future appliances
and write the details about the appliances.

*Skills:

+ Speaking: work in pair to ask and answer the questions; talk about their future
appliances..

+ Writing: complete the sentences with the correct form of verb, write the words under
the pictures.

*Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their home.

Competences: expressing preferences about types of houses and appliances in the
future.

II. Preparations:

- Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment:

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: 
2. Warm- up: (3 minutes)

- T chats with Ss about their houses.
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity l: Vocabulary ( 4 minutes)

Aims: To help SS to revise vocabulary by

completing some exercises.

Process: T introduces some words.
Ss write down.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercises

I. Vocabulary

wireless (aj) vô tuyến điện
automatic (aj) tự động

Activity 2: Grammar ( 19 minutes)
Aims: To help SS to practice grammar by

completing exercises
Process:

Ss do exercise 1.

Ss do exercise 2.

Ss write their answers into their notebooks.

II. Grammar

1. Using the words in the box, write

the correct word under each picture.
a, robot

b, automatic dishwasher
c, wireless TV

d, automatic washing machine
e, modern fridge

f, smart clock

2. Think about what the appliances 
will do in the future.

Key: Possible answers.

</div>
(198)<div class='page_container' data-page=198>

Ss do exercise 3.
Ss work individually.
Ss do exercise 4.
Ss work individually.

T corrects and gives the feedback.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercises.

hanging them in the sun.

3. watch TV with many channel we
can chat on TV.

4. warn accidents for drivers.
5. say the time precisely and …..
6. wash and dry dishes.

Exercise 3. Complete the sentences 
with ‘ will’ and ‘won’t’.

Key:

1. won’t
2. will
3. will
4. won’t
5. will
6. won’t

Exercise 4. Complete the sentences 
with “might or might not”.

1. might
2. might
3. might not
4. might not
5. might, might
Activity 3: Communication (10 minutes)
Aims: To help SS to practice speaking

Process:

T asks Ss to match the questions with the
correct answers.

Ss work in pairs.
Ss do the role-play.

Conclusion: Almost all the students can
complete the exercises.

III. Communication.

5. Work in pairs. Using the

information in 2 ask and answer the 
questions.

Example:

1. A: Will robots clean your house in
the future?

B: Yes, they will.

2. A: Will super cars run on water in
the future?

B; No, they won’t.
4. Practice and consolidation: (4 minutes)

Retell about their future appliances.

5. Subsequent activities: (3 minutes)

- Redo all the exercises above and do exercises E3 page 21- workbook.
- Do exercise 4- textbook.

- Prepare: Unit 11

Preparation day: /0 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 0 / 2016 6B: ……/0…/ 2016 6E: …/0 / 2016

</div>
(199)<div class='page_container' data-page=199>

I. Objectives:

After the lesson students need:

*Knowledge: Understand the dialogue in getting started and know the words about
environmental problems, their causes and effects.

*Skills:

+ Listening: Listen to the conversation between Phong and Nick

+ Reading: Read the conversation and complete the table and sentences.
* Attitude: To teach SS to be responsible for protecting environment.
*Competences: talking about environmental problems.

II. Preparations

- Materials: Textbook, pictures, visual aids.
- Equipment: Tape + cassette player

III. Teaching process:

1. Intended test and evaluation: 
2. Warm - up: (3 minutes)

Ask Ss to look at the picture on Page 44 and answer the questions :
+ Who are they?

+ Where are they?

+ What might they be talking about?
3. New lesson: (30 minutes)

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation (7 minutes)
* Aims: - Ss know how to read new words,

identify their meanings and use them to make
sentences and know what they are going to
listen.

* Process: - Pre-teach new words

- Play the recording. Ss listen and read. Ask Ss
if their guesses on the board are correct.

* Conclusion: - Almost all the students know
new words and what they are going to listen.

I. Vocabulary:
- a loaf of bread (n):
- reusable (adj):
- natural (adj):
- material (n):
- environment (n):
- check – out (n):
- prepare (v):
Activity 2: Practice (18 minutes)
* Aims:- SS get the content of the

conversation between two people and the
complete the exercises.

* Process:

Exercise 1: a- Ss work independently.
Allow them to share answers before
discussing as a class. Write the correct
answers on the board.

b- First, ask Ss to read column A and B to
make sure they understand. Ask Ss to give
their answers without reading the

conversation again. Then ask them to read
the conversation and check their answers.

Exercise 2: Tell Ss that in the box are
some environmental problems. Make sure
that Ss understand the meaning of each

II. Practice:

1. Listen and read

a. Read the conversation again and complete 
the following sentences. Use no more than 
three words in each blank.

1. on a picnic
2. reusable; natural
3. the check –out
4. a/ a reusable
5. cycling

b- Based on the ideas in the conversation, 
match the first half of the sentence in column 
A with its second half in column B.

1. b 2. c 3. a

</div>
(200)<div class='page_container' data-page=200>

problem. Ss look at the five pictures and
tell what they can see in each picture.
Then, Ss do this exercise individually then
compare their answers with a classmate.
Ss give T their answers. Write Ss’
answers on the board without saying if

their answers are correct.

Exercise 3: Play the recording for Ss to
listen, check and repeat their answers.
Ex4: Ask Ss to read the “ Watch out” box,
T gives example of the two structures. If
time follows, have some Ss give their own
examples.

Ss work in pairs to complete this exercise.
Check the answers with the whole class.
Confirm the correct answer. After that,
ask some Ss to read the sentences aloud.
* Conclusion:

Almost all the students can understand the
conversation and complete the exercises.

2. used to introduce a new subject for
consideration or to give further information.
3. used to say “no” or “ not” strongly ( can
also be used to mean “ no problem”

2. There are a lot of environmental

problems today. Write each problem in the 
box under the picture.

1. soil pollution
2. deforestation

3. water pollution
4. noise pollution
5. air pollution

3. Now, listen , check and repeat the
answers.

* Watch out!

To express effects we can use the structures “
to make Sth/ Sbd do Sth” or “ to cause Sth”
4. Match the causes in column A with the 
effects in column B

1. b 2. d 3. e 4. c 5. A
Activity 3: Production (5 minutes)
* Aims:- Help Ss develop speaking and skill

by doing some exercises
* Process:

Ex5: Ask Ss if they understand the steps in
the book. Ss work in groups of six and
follow the steps. Gives each group a large
sheet of paper and ask Ss to write down the
effects in five minutes. After five minutes,
Ss stick their answers on the board or on the
wall. The group with the most effects wins.
* Conclusion:Almost all the students can
complete the tasks.

III. Further practice

5- Game: which group is the winner?
1. Make groups of six

2. As a class, choose one environmental
problem in2.

3. In five minutes, write down as many
effects of the problem as possible.

4. After five minutes, one member from
each group runs quickly to the board and
writes the effects

5. The group with the most effects wins!
4. Practice and consolidation: (5 minutes)

- Retell the main content of the lesson: Talk about environmental problems, their causes
and effects.

. Subsequent activities: (2 minutes)
- Learn new works by heart

- Read the conversation again

- Do exercises + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese
- Prepare: Unit 11: A closer look 1

Preparation day: /0 / 2016

Teaching days: 6A: ……/ 0 / 2016 6B: ……/0…/ 2016 6E: …/0 / 2016

</div>

Unit 1. My hobbies. Lesson 1. Getting started

<i>Period 1</i>

HƯỚNG DẪN CÁCH HỌC & ÔN TẬP ĐẦU NĂM

: Understand about learning program of new English 6.

minutes)

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

<i>Period 2 LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED</i>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue

Free talk:

1.b ; 2.e; 3.j; 4.d; 5.c; 6.i; 7.f; 8.a; 9.g; 10.h

<b> </b>

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

<i>Period 3</i>

<b> LESSON 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1</b>

ᵊᵘ/

ᵊᵘ/

ᵊᵘ/

<i>ᵊᵘ/ </i>

3. Practice.

ᵊᵘ/

<i>ᵊᵘ/ </i>

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

<i>Period 4 </i>

<b>LESSON 3: A CLOSER LOOK 2</b>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to

<i>ᵊᵘ/ </i>

3. Compare Vy’s first week with yours.

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

<i>Period 5</i>

<b>LESSON 4: COMMUNICATION</b>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about school

T: How do you make friends? When you

Period 6

<b>LESSON 5: SKILL 1</b>

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get information about the

SS will be able to write a webpage for their school with good punctuation

UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL

SS will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit 1

<i>Period 9</i>

UNIT 2: MY HOME

<b>Lesson 1: Getting started</b>

<b>I. Objectives: </b>

- Ss will be able to listen to get information about rooms and

furniture in the house

- Vocabulary: Home lexical items

- Grammar: There is / There isn’t. There are / There aren’t

Prepositions of place

items related to the topic "My Home".

:

- be‘hind

(prep) ở phía sau, đằng sau

<b>- next to</b>

(prep) ở cạnh

- in front of (prep) ở đằng trước

<b>- be‘tween</b>

(prep) ở giữa

<b>- ‘under</b>

(prep) ở dưới

- move

(v)

di chuyển

- ‘noisy

(adj)

ồn ào, ầm ĩ

a‘partment (n)

căn hộ

- ‘cousin

(n)

anh (em) họ

No, I don’t

<i><b>Which family members does Mi talk </b></i>

<i><b>about?</b></i>

grandparents

dad

uncle

mum

aunt

brother

cousin

T asks Ss if they know the